<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>The stock market crash - and after</title>
        <author>
          <persName>
            <forname>Irving</forname>
            <surname>Fisher</surname>
          </persName>
        </author>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt />
      <sourceDesc>
        <bibl>
          <msIdentifier>
            <idno>1815583320</idno>
          </msIdentifier>
        </bibl>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text>
    <body>
      <div>
        <pb n="1" />
        EIGENTUM
DES
IN STITUTS
MELTWIRTSCHAFT
EL
R'BLIOTHEK

T 15357
        <pb n="2" />
        THE STOCK MARKET CRASH—
AND AFTER
        <pb n="3" />
        THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
NEW YORK . BOSTON . CHICAGO . DALLAS
ATLANTA . BAN FRANCIRCH

MACMILLAN &amp;amp; CO., LiMrrep
LONDON . BOMBAY . CALCUTTA
MELBOTIRNE

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
OF CANADA, LiMiTED
TORONTO
        <pb n="4" />
        919-1926 COMPARED WITH
PRECEDING TWO DECADES

400

350

300

| PRIMARY y,
HORSEPOWER

IR{

A

; MFG.
our

20

-
Hi

10C

NO. OF
WORKERS

OUT: EE

WORKER

i ‘ { Posie
THE GROWTH OF MANUFACT!IRES
} (FED. RES. BOARD DAT?

50 y mr — La iin ie
1899 1904 1909 1914 1919 21 23 25 27

CHART 1.~~The Hoover Committee on Recent Economic
Changes reports, for 1922-1927, an increased “tempo” of production
 due to inventions and improvements in the arts, by
which “production per man hour of effort has risen to new
heights,” together with “higher per capita income in 1922-1927
than ever before.” This record largely explains the rise of
stock prices to a new plateau, which remained after the panic
of 1929 (see Chart 4).
        <pb n="5" />
        THE

STOCK MARKET CRASH—

AND AFTER

BY

IRVING FISHER

JROFESSOR OF ECONOMICS, YALE UNIVERSITY

NEW YORK
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
1930
        <pb n="6" />
        CoPYRIGHT, 1930,
By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.

All rights reserved—no part of this book
may be reproduced in any form without
permission in writing from the publishers.

Set up and electrotyped.
Published February, 1930.

2
Tent tv

~

4d

v

SET UP BY BROWN BROTHERS LINOTYPERS
PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
BY THE FERRIS PRINTING COMPANY
        <pb n="7" />
        PREFACE

Thuis book is the outgrowth of several years’ study
of the stock market consequent on the publication by
me, in the newspapers, of weekly and daily index
numbers of stock prices, sales and values.
In trying to appraise the market crash during the
autumn of 1929, I have made use of all sources of
information available to me to date.
Readers will doubtless find some inconsistencies
between my previous writings and the present book,
as I have modified my opinions from time to time
with the march of events and with the unfolding of
evidence. I may, and probably shall, further modify
them with subsequent developments.
The book is in no sense, therefore, an attempt to
justify opinions hitherto expressed. It has been
written without reference to any previous expressions.
 I had stated my opinion in September, preceding
 the panic, that the market had reached its peak,
as proved to be the case. I also expressed the view
that the recession would not be in the nature of a
serious crash, in which I was mistaken. I also predicted
 that the new plateau of stock prices would
survive any recession. This has proved true (see
Chart 4).
1 have also tried in this book to set forth the chief

ri
        <pb n="8" />
        vii

Preface

opinions held by others, whether or not they agree
with my own conclusions, past or present, in the
hope that the reader will in this way have before
him all the chief points of view that it is practicable
to assemble.
To publish the book now may seem audacious, but
there is advantage in writing tentative conclusions
while impressions and memories are still fresh.
Someone has said that the “true perspective’ of the
historian really means he waits until everyone who
could contradict him has died!
It is, of course, too early to reach any absolutely
sure conclusions; nothing is more difficult to analyze
and understand thoroughly than a panic; especially,
a panic so great and so peculiar as that which has
visited the American stock market. It stands unique
in the annals of finance. But even if some of the
views here expressed should later be found in need
of revision, I trust this book will have served its purpose
 by contributing somewhat toward a better eventual
 understanding of the problem. The ordinary
explanations now finding the greatest currency seem
to me far too simple and naive.

IrviNG FISHER.

Yale University,
December 15, 1929.
        <pb n="9" />
        ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

MANY friends, interested in the causes of the
stock market crash and problems arising therefrom,
have done me the favor of reading a mimeographed
draft of this book. I am indebted to them for their
many helpful suggestions. Their names, alphabetized,
 follow: Luther Blake, Lindsay Bradford,
Charles W. Colby, W. J. Couper, Hunt T. Dickinson,
 Gayer G. Dominick, Allen Dulles, Lionel D.
Edie, George W. Fraker, Henry J. Fuller, Edward
H. Green, K. G. Karsten, Fred I. Kent, Leonard
Kuvin, J. W. Laird, E. P. Maynard, Richard S.
Maynard, J. Edward Meeker, Royal Meeker, J. A.
Moffitt, George K. Morrow, George B. Roberts,
George E. Roberts, Leland Rex Robinson, Malcolm
C. Rorty, Melvin Sawin, Laurence H. Sloan, Carl
Snyder, Charles T. Treadway, B. L. Winchell and
B. L. Winchell, Jr.
I wish especially to acknowledge the constructive
work of H. Bruce Brougham, who has collaborated
with me in the writing of this book.
        <pb n="10" />
        INTRODUCTION

MANY causes have been assigned for the stock
market crash of 1929. These usually take the form
of putting the blame on different individuals or
groups. United States Senator Robinson of Arkansas
 blames President Hoover, Secretary Mellon and
Ex-President Coolidge for their “unduly optimistic
statements’ about business conditions, which he says,
worked the country into a fever of speculation. But
United States Senator Robinson, Republican, of Indiana,
 praises the administration, and holds that
John J. Raskob, Chairman of the Democratic
National Committee, was among those who were
“psychologically” responsible for the collapse, by
urging people to buy stocks.
Senator Glass blames the “stock gamblers.” The
Reverend John Haynes Holmes holds the brokers
and their unholy ways responsible. A prominent
banker ascribes the Wall Street crash largely to the
blocking of the Tariff Bill in Congress. New York
State Senator Hastings finds the cause in those who
“sold short.” Congressman Clyde Kelly blames
“this nation-wide gambling house which is called the
New York Stock Exchange.”
Mr. Daniel W. Blumenthal finds implicated in
the panic certain brokers “who successfully carried
        <pb n="11" />
        xil

Introduction

out a well-defined wash-sale conspiracy and false circulation
 campaign” Mr. Durant declares that the
President paid no attention to his warning of an
approaching crash, and blames the Federal Reserve
Board for causing it. He says the Federal Reserve
Board should have put down the rediscount rate to 3
per cent, while Mr. H. Parker Willis blames the
Reserve Board for not having drastically raised the
rediscount rate.
Sir George Paish says that the crash came because
the bankers had gotten everybody into debt. The
Investment Trusts have been blamed for “dumping”
on the market. The New York Times praises the
banks, but excoriates the “nation-wide army of speculators,
 large and small, who had engaged in the twoyear
 bubble-blowing.” Mr. Babson has been blamed
for saying that a crash would come “sooner or later.”
Dr. John H. Gray blames Mr. Mellon, Mr. Coolidge,
 and myself for “always insisting that all was
well and talking of prosperity, a new era, and
increased efficiency of production.” In this catalogue
of wholesale and particular blamings one is reminded
of that old panic of 1837, in Van Buren’s administration,
 when the Associated Merchants of New
York City published a resolution asking, “On what
constitutional or moral grounds can Martin Van
Buren defend himself for having caused all the disasters
 under which the American people are
suffering?”
Doubtless there is some truth in almost all of
these allocations of responsibility for the panic. But
        <pb n="12" />
        "

STOCK PRICES ror LAST HALF of 1929 TWO WARNING SIGNALS AND STOCK CRASH

350)

204

X EXCHANGE CLOSED

oF
2G
2

if
55k
[4

REO

a0

HE
£683

7d

— - * gr ow ww
}] ls 38 Jeo [27 | 0 17 2a 3 oc 14 21 [28 (5 ye |@ [26 |2 [9 IB
. JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER _ OCTOBER I NOVEMBER

ei Bo
DECEMBER ]

CHART 2.—The first sharp drop was after the raising of the New York Federal Reserve rediscount
rate from § to 6 per cent on August 8. The Hatry failure in London started the British crash on August 30.
During September there was heavy liquidation on the New York Stock Exchange. The American crash
began October 12, lasting until November 13, when stock prices touched bottom.
        <pb n="13" />
        Kv

Introduction

rather than appraising such a disaster in terms of
praise and blame, an unemotional assessment of it in
terms of cause and effect might yield much in public
benefit by way of preventing the recurrence of such
crises.

Intimations of the Panic
“Hindsight” is always clearer than foresight.
Looking backward now and putting the events of the
panic in perspective, we find that there were definite
foreshadowings of its coming. As early as April 18,
1929, the National City Bank of New York said in
a special circular: “If the rate of credit increase rises
above the rate of business growth, we have a condition
 of inflation which manifests itself in rising prices
in some departments of the business structure, overconfidence,
 excessive speculation, and an eventual
crash.”
This statement was followed by an analysis that
notes a yearly increase in the total volume of business
 in this country, taking business in all its forms,
at a fairly uniform rate of 4 per cent; and that for
the year 1928 the total production and the exchange
of goods in the United States increased over 1927
at a rate somewhat below this, or about 3 per cent.
As against this growth of business and production,
the statement measured the growth of credits—s3.1
per cent for the year 1928. This did not appear to
be greatly in excess of the normal growth of business
requirements. But the statement added:
“Taking account of the extraordinary growth of
        <pb n="14" />
        Introduction

XV

brokers’ loans ‘for account of others’ as reported by
both the New York banks and the stock exchange,
from $1,627,000,000 at the end of 1927 to $3,361,
000,000 at the end of 1928, we find the total increase
of credit, as represented by the bank figures and the
loans ‘for others’ combined, to have been from
$57,0%717,000,000 to $61,627,000,000, or 8 per cent,
a difference as compared with the estimated increase
of business which can only spell inflation.”
Other observers had noted symptoms of unusual
inflation of credit, denoting that the market had
reached its high and might be on the verge of decline.
 Among these were Malcolm C. Rorty,- of
the International Telephone &amp;amp; Telegraph Company;
Paul Clay, of United States Shares Corporation, and
Emerson Wirt Axe. In an article in The Adnnalist
of October, 18, 1929, Mr. Axe observed that “no
really sustained advance is to be expected” because
of the “systematic distributive campaign.” On September
 sth, in an address at his Annual National
Business Conference, Mr. Babson said: “I still repeat
 what I said at this time last year and the year
before ;* namely, that sooner or later a crash is coming
 which will take the leading stocks and cause a
decline of from 60 to 80 points in the Dow-Jones
Barometer.” On the same day, in an interview with
The Hartford Courant, I stated that while none of
us was infallible, “there may be a recession of stock

* At that time (1927) the Dow-Jones average was 194; 60 points
below which would be 134. The lowest point reached after the
crash (Nov. 13, 1929) was 199.
        <pb n="15" />
        xvi

Introduction

prices.” But I did not at that time believe that there
would be anything in the nature of a serious crash.
I had said, in an article published in many newspapers,
 May 12, 1929, that the so-called “Hoover
boom” in the stock market had about reached its
climax. The “Hoover market” had risen above the
forecast line, calculated by the Karsten Statistical
Laboratories in New Haven, by from 12 to 25 per
cent from the time of Mr. Hoover's election to his
taking of the oath of office on March 4th, after
which, up to the close of April, it receded to 18 per
cent above the line. In this article I remarked that
all previous departures from the Karsten so-called
“line of fundamentals” had returned within a short
period to this forecast line, and added:
“The ‘Hoover Market’ can hardly go much further
 above the forecast line. It may fall below, but
in that case it will fall to a higher level than the
peaks of the previous booms.”
This opinion was fulfilled. As the Karsten chart
shows (with the white zone bounding the recorded
average of the market each month) the continuous
forecast line, based on previous records of various
items of business conditions, represents with fair
accuracy the long swings of the market. The departures
 from the line, up or down, represent the “psychological”
 short swings, as shown on the accompanying
 chart. These characterized the collapse of
the stock market at the onset of the war in 1914;
the war boom of 1915-1916; the marked depression
of 1917, during the period of Federal financing
        <pb n="16" />
        AOVES

SECOND
CJOLIDGE
ROOM

SECOND
SOLIDGE
“INA

IRST
OLIDG:
re

Us GOV...
FiNaNCING

CHART 3.—Booms, recoveries and panics are here represented
 by departures from the Karsten “line of fundamentals”
 which is used to predict the course of stock
prices. The Hoover boom and collapse represent the
most serious departures from the line since 1913.
        <pb n="17" />
        xviii

Introduction

through higher taxes and the sale of bonds; the postwar
 depression of 1920-1921; the recovery and the
“Coolidge boom” of 1923-1924, and the second
“Coolidge boom” of 1925-1926.
The “Hoover boom” fluctuated more violently
above the Karsten forecast line than any previous
fluctuation, either up or down. In the retrospect it
is easy to appreciate that preliminary symptoms of
the crash were not lacking.

Two Sides of the Picture
But it is not so easy to see in the foregoing picture
the underlying factors of the panic, and to judge
whether it sprang from vital defects of the business
structure or from more superficial causes relating to
credit and finance.
The avalanche came so swiftly, spreading such
immediate and widespread disaster, that careful consideration
 of its origin is requisite.
The first symptomatic recession in the stock market
in August and early September attracted comparatively
 little attention. Almost every recession during
 the course of the long bull market had been followed
 by recovery equal to the recession, and then
progress upwards. But the decline of September,
1929, although followed by an upward recovery, was
renewed in October, and developed into terrific
crashes lasting into November. Between the 5th of
September and the 13th of November the vast bear
movement had carried stocks down by about 42 per
cent, and reduced the value of stocks listed on
        <pb n="18" />
        Introduction

XIX

the New York Stock Exchange by an estimated
$26,000,000,000.
In the bull market stocks had reached a level more
than double that of 1926—that is, the prices on the
average of stocks on the New York Exchange had
risen by more than 100 per cent in three short years.
Before the November panic, the stock price level was
not only twice the level of 1926, but nearly four times
the level of 1913, before the war.
And that is not all. What has just been said
applies to stocks which were simply ‘“held,” so to
speak. If an investor had bought stocks in 1913 and
held them in his strong-box until September, 1929,
he would have had $400 for every $100 invested sixteen
 years before, and he would have had $200 for
every $100 invested in 1926. Moreover, while
stocks ‘‘held” in this way increased on the average at
a tremendous rate, stocks in active tradings among
the market leaders increased still faster. To be
specific, if in 1926 a trader, as distinguished from
a strong-box holder, had bought stocks which were
then market favorites and had changed his holdings
from week to week, so as each week to possess those
which had proved most popular that week, instead of
having merely the $200 for every $100 invested in
1926, as the strong-box holder had, he, the trader,
would have $1,000 for every $100 of his original
investment. These statements are evidenced by my
two weekly indexes of stocks held and stocks
traded—called the Investors’ Index and the Traders’
Index.
        <pb n="19" />
        XX

Introduction

The public utilities stocks reached such a height
that the average yield was only 3 per cent. Allied
Chemical &amp;amp; Dye, one of the “blue chips,” was selling
 so that the yield was only 134 per cent, and there
were other stocks higher priced than that, and with
correspondingly smaller yields. In many companies,
the common stocks had lower yields than the bonds
in those same companies.
Now with all these facts before us, we are tempted
to conclude that such an advance in stock prices was
thoroughly unsound, if not that deflation should go
on until the level of 1926 should again prevail, or
even that of 1913. Based on such a diagnosis, the
prognosis would show the business of the country to
be in a very bad way.
During the rise of the market, brokers’ loans
reached the unprecedented total of more than
$8,000,000,000, and of this total $3,000,000,000
were cut off within a few weeks. Investment trusts,
genuine and so-called, had become the fashion.
They had absorbed $3,000,000,000 of investors’
money, $1,000,000,000 of it during the rise of the
market in 1929. They had had a rapid mushroom
growth, rising from under 200 in number in January,
1929, to 400 or more by the time of the panic.
The Federal Reserve Board had issued its warning
 of an inflated stock market back in March,
1929, with a resultant shutting off of stock market
credit that at once precipitated a near-panic. This
was alleviated through the action of Charles E.
Mitchell, Chairman of the National City Bank of
        <pb n="20" />
        Introduction

xxi

New York, who made $100,000,000 available to
the market at high rates. For this accommodation
Mr. Mitchell was severely criticized by Senator
Carter Glass, a co-author of the Federal Reserve
Act, and by other financial authorities. President
Hazlewood, of the American Bankers’ Association,
in his annual address before that body, September 1,
had complained about the high stock market and
the enormous total of brokers’ loans, so that the
bankers passed a resolution condemning the situation
 as dangerous and asking for a thoroughgoing
investigation of brokers’ loans.
Here is a picture that portended and predicted the
disaster that came. In the rapidly mounting aggregate
 of margin accounts the unsoundness of the situation
 stands revealed. From it many have hastily
concluded that the new plateau of stock prices was
wholly unwarranted and merely the result of insane
speculation.
But there is another side of the picture. Of
course, a judge is not fitted to pronounce judgment
until he has heard both sides. There is the story of
the Irish justice of the peace who heard one side of
the case which was so convincingly presented that he
said: “Stop. My decision is made.” Whereat the
opposing attorney cried, “Your Honor, you have not
yet heard my side.” To this the learned judge answered:
 “I don’t want to hear the other side. It
might have a tindency to confuse the court. The
case is perfectly clear to me now.”
However confusing it may be to study this intri-
        <pb n="21" />
        xxil

Introduction

cate problem, those legislators and leaders of business
 and finance to whom the nation looks for guidance,
 owe it to themselves and their country to
function as a fair court and to hear the other side.
To begin at the beginning: Since every stock price
represents a discounted value of the future dividends
and earnings of that stock, there are four reasons
that may justify a rise in the price level of stocks:
(1) Because the earnings are continually plowedback
 into business instead of being declared in dividends,
 this plowing-back resulting in an accumulation
at compound interest, so to speak;
(2) Because the expected earnings will increase
on account of technical progress within the industry;
(3) Because less risk is believed to attach to those
earnings than formerly;
(4) Because the “basis” by which the discounting
is made has been lowered.
When the situation is calmly examined, it is found
that all four of these causes were at work, tending
to raise the prices on the stock market during the
years preceding the panic of 1929.
        <pb n="22" />
        CONTENTS

PREFACE .
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
INTRODUCTION .
CHARTS .

PAGE
vii
ix
xi

XXV

CHAPTER

[. Tue Stock MARKET CrASH
II. PresipeENT Hoover Acts .
ITI. Causes oF THE Panic
IV. Tue THrEaT To BUSINESS
V. Prowep-Back EarNINGS .
VI. Cuancep Ratio or Prices To EARNINGS
VII. Tue Ace oF MERGERS . .
VIII. Scientiric ReEsearcH AND INVENTION
IX. InpustriaAL MANAGEMENT . .
Laror’s CodpeEraTIVE Poricy .
Tue Divipenps oF PROHIBITION .
REerier in Seven YEARS OF STABLE MONEY
FricuT FROM BonDs TO STOCKS .  .
SpecuLaTiON AND BROKERS’ Loans .
REMEDIES AND PrEVENTIVES OF PaNics
Tae HoperurL OUTLOOK
APPENDIX .

X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.

21
32
36
66
81
101
119
142
157
175
182
198
218
238
257
271
        <pb n="23" />
        CHARTS

CHART
1. Growth of Manufactures, 1919-1926,
Preceding Two Decades

Compared with
Frontispiece

2. Stock Prices, Last Half of 1929 . . .
3. Booms, Recoveries and Panics, 1914-1929
4. Stock Price Index Numbers, 1870-1929
s. Stock Price Indexes: London, New York, Paris and
Berlin, 1927-1929 . . . . .
6. Net Profits and Stock Prices, Railroads . . . .
7. Net Profits and Stock Prices, All Industries . . .
8. Net Profits and Stock Prices, Public Utilities
9. Cash Dividends and Total Earnings As Per Cents of
Market Prices . . . . . + . «=10.
 Price Earnings Ratios, All Industries, Variable
Group, 1928-1929 . . . . . . Lo
11. Price Earnings Ratios, 45 Industrials, Fixed Group .
12. Price Earnings Ratios, 25 Rails, Fixed Group . .
13. Mergers Recorded, 1919-1928 . . 4 x 3
14. Prime Cost, Physical Volume of Production and Unit
Prime Cost . . . . . .
15. Electricity Displaces Other Power
16. Managerial Control . .
17. Weekly Wage Rate, Hours Worked and Unit Prime
Cost oo... 159
18. Industrial Disputes and Workers Involved, 1916-1928 167
19. Wholesale Commodity Prices, 1923-1929 . 186

PAGE
xiii
xvii
2

CX
        <pb n="24" />
        xxvi

Charts

CHART
20. Industrial Production—Federal Reserve Credit Control
 . . . . 189
21. Wholesale Commodity Price Movements, 1800-1930 . 193
22. New Securities Issued=—Stocks vs. Bonds, 1919-1929 . 199
23. Financing by Investment Trusts, etc. . 215
24. Brokers’ Loans and Stock Values 222
25. Sources of Brokers’ Loans 22%

PAGE
        <pb n="25" />
        THE STOCK MARKET CRASH—
AND AFTER
        <pb n="26" />
        THE STOCK MARKET CRASH—
AND AFTER

CHAPTER 1

THE STOCK MARKET CRASH

THE most rapid and precipitous decline of stock
prices in the history of American security tradings
commenced on September 6, 1929, and continued,
with only minor recoveries, until November 13th,
after extraordinary measures had been taken to check
the panic.
The unexpected advance in Federal Reserve rediscount
 rate at New York, from 5 per cent to 6 per
cent on August 8th, was a percursor of the slump.
The average of my daily industrial stock index fell
from 195.3 on the preceding day to 191.4; the average
 of rails descended from 152.9 to 149.6, and of
utilities from 239.2 to 233.9. Sharp recoveries, however,
 carried the market averages to new high levels,
as follows: Industrial stock prices climbed to 211.8
on September 7th; rails to 163.7 on September 4th;
public utilities reached a new high of 259.3 on September
 3rd, then falling off to a level of 250.4 on
September 13th, and resuming their climb to a record
high of 267.3 on September 24th.
        <pb n="27" />
        The Stock Market Crash—And After
Course of Stock Recession
From September 7th, there was a steady drop for
industrials to a low of 198.9 on the closing of September
 3oth, representing a decline of 12.9 points.

STOCK PRICE INDEX NUMBERS

IRVING FISHER'S INDEX
1926 w~-200



ay

~y

RATIO SCALL
RIS [Fat 1g

-
on
-

MV

/

MM

‘od
350
300
230

200

100
90
80
To
0
0

4

“if

M
A A ~V) A,
| Ve 8
oreo] — eesmreptmellegmrnt
870 75 80 85 90 95 oo W TT25 wo
CHART 4.—~Three Plateaus: 1870-1905, 1905-1913, IQX5-1923;
thence sharp upward climb to September, 1929. Inset chart shows
October-November crash, 1929, not halfway down from rise since
1926.

Railroad shares had dropped to a low of 151.0 on
September 30th, and utilities to 260.0.
Liquidation continued in October, with the volume
of stock trading mounting into record figures. Transactions
 for October reached the total of 141,664,900
        <pb n="28" />
        The Stock Market Crash

2

shares, as against the previous record monthly volume
 of 114,779,500 shares for November, 1928.
Trading records for single days were eclipsed, so
that on October 29, the turnover amounted to 16,-410,000
 shares, as against a previous peak of
8,246,700 shares on March 26, 1929. The March
record was beaten on three different days of October,
while on October 29th, the New York Curb, the second
 largest stock market in the world, recorded a
five-hour session of 7,096,300 shares.
Industrials reached their record low of 122.7 on
November 13th, rails touched bottom at 116.3 on
that day, while public utilities dropped to 149.1.
During this disastrous month the machinery of the
New York Stock Exchange was badly clogged, with
lagging tickers adding to the confusion, while traders
shut their eyes and plunged into the market, trusting
almost wholly to luck to get execution for their
orders. It was reported that these blind orders resulted
 in the purchase or sale of stocks five points or
more below their current selling price on the tape.
Curiously, money rates which had occasioned the
first sharp break of August were not a factor in the
disastrous liquidation of the two-month panic.
Many influences worked together to set the stage and
arrange the climax for this great financial drama.
The flow-back of funds from October 1st dividend
and interest payments released a volume of credit
that eased money rates in the New York market and
brokers’ loans continued to grow. There had been
an appreciable slackening of industry from the be-
        <pb n="29" />
        The Stock Market Crash—And After
ginning of July. Mr. Babson's statement, which
ordinarily would have made little impression,
coupled with the Hatry failure in London, which
obliged English holders of American stocks to sell
in order to protect their own commitments, directed
attention to the overextension of stock market
credits and the unsound banking condition. The
statement by Philip Snowden, British Chancellor of
the Exchequer, that the “orgy of speculation” in this
country had been responsible for the advance in the
rediscount rate of the Bank of England, whether it
was true or not, had a depressing effect on the
American market. Every fresh rumor sent the market
 lower.

4

Meanwhile the unusual ease’ in the money market
was helped by the heavy accumulation of funds in
New York as the result of subscriptions to new capital
 issues. The call-money rate, which had run above
15 per cent during the height of the summer speculation,
 fell to 6 per cent, then to 5 per cent, and later
to 414 per cent. Corporations piled in their large
loanable balances. The Reserve Banks continued
as active buyers of bankers’ acceptances, which enabled
 the member banks to reduce their indebtedness
to the Reserve to the lowest figures reached since
1927. Soon thereafter the volume of commercial
loans dropped off, releasing further credits to aid
liquidation in a falling market.
October was the first month to show greatly reduced
 totals of new stock issues floated. Foreigners
were ordering their holdings of stocks sold out.
        <pb n="30" />
        The Stock Market Crash

S

That was why brokers’ loans for a time continued to
increase, because with each sale by a foreign holder,
those who bought applied for loans to carry the surplus
 supply of securities that had not yet found
definite lodgement.

“Undigested” Securities
The brokers’ underwritings of new stocks or bonds
now became an essential factor in the expansion of
brokers’ loans. The newly underwritten securities
began to pile up, to remain “undigested,” that is, not
disposed of for permanent investment. Also, much
of the money paid in to Investment Trusts by investors
 in return for certificates was in cash or lent in
the market, and not yet invested in stocks. After
the crash began this money waited for the market to
touch bottom. The Financial Chronicle of October
12th showed that $649,000,000 in new investment
trust shares—1I am not certain how these new “trusts”
are classified—were offered by syndicates during September;
 that this was added to $707,000,000 offered
during July and August, bringing the total issues during
 the first nine months of 1929 to $2,239,000,000.
The bulk of these offerings was not absorbed. They
were carried along on borrowed money—or purchased
 outright with other securities, carried on
margin in order to provide the funds—creating a
New situation in the money market. Stock flotations
in 1922 and 1923 had risen to about five billions a
year. By 1927 and 1928 the five billions became ten
billions yearly. But for the first half of 1929 they
        <pb n="31" />
        6 The Stock Market Crash—And After

amounted to $6,125,000,000 and, during September
alone, a total of $1,015,000,000 was added, while
brokers’ loans rose by $670,000,000. During the
catastrophic month of October the flood of new
corporate offerings persisted to the extent of $757,-254,000,
 bringing new corporate issues for the first
ten months of the year to $9,413,451,000, of which
common stocks were $6,535,251,000. The financing
by investment trusts and trading and holding companies
 absorbed $2,443,000,000 of the total new
issues; the investment trust issues were, of course, a
special type of “refunding” rather than new issues.
It was largely this tremendous volume of new
financing that projected the top-heavy market into
the abyss.

The Conference of Bankers
On October 21st, with the market breaking wide
open, the tape two hours late, and sellers of market
leaders finding “air pockets” down which their offerings
 catapulted, leading bank executives gathered at
the office of J. P. Morgan &amp;amp; Company.
The conference included the heads of four of the
greatest banks, representing in excess of $6,000,000,-000
 of resources, namely, the National City, Chase
National, the Bankers’ Trust and the Guaranty
Trust. Later in the day representatives of thirty
leading stock exchange houses met in conference.
Mr. Lamont of the Morgan firm, spokesman for the
gathering of bankers, stated that the break was a
“technical” one, not based on anything fundamentally
        <pb n="32" />
        The Stock Market Crash

7

wrong, that the market had run into “air pockets”
with urgent and heavy offerings and a marked absence
of bids.
It was confusion worse confounded, the brokendown
 machinery making it as difficult to buy as to
sell. October 21st was a day of “blind” sales, where
stocks sold from ten to thirty points below the quotations
 recorded on the belated ticker, and with the
principal selling appearing to come from large operators
 in blocks of from five thousand to twenty thousand
 shares.

On October 28th, the greatest single day’s break in
the history of the stock market cut many billion dollars
 from the market values of securities on the New
York Stock Exchange and Curb Exchange. General
Motors lost $1,00,000,000 in value of its 43,500,
000 shares of stock outstanding. General Electric
had dropped 120 points from its high to the low of
the reaction on October 24th, Westinghouse Electric
&amp;amp; Manufacturing crashed 194 points, American and
Foreign Power fell 11114 points, American Telephone
 and Telegraph sunk 130 points. All groups
gave way. On October 28th, General Motors again
broke below 50, while Chrysler, the leader of the
1928 bull market in motors, found a new low below
40, off more than 100 points from the year’s high.
There was heavy selling in the railroad stocks, which
had thus far resisted the weight of liquidation, and
wide-open breaks, especially in the higher-priced
stocks, which had for weeks held steady. Reports
from commission houses dwelt on the appalling cata-
        <pb n="33" />
        8 The Stock Market Crash—And After
logue of accounts cleaned out, with thousands of
individuals who had lost their entire speculative
capital.

A Rich Man's and Poor Man's Panic
This was not simply a poor man's panic. Probably
 it began by the “big fellows” trying to get out
from under, followed by short sales in large blocks
by “bears.” Only after the first sharp break were
the “little fellows” ruthlessly sold out, when they
were unable to meet new demands for increased
margins.
That rich men were involved in the heavy liquidation
 was shown by the recessions of bank stocks,
largely held by the wealthy. Although small bankstock
 dealers found themselves “long” of bank shares
at high prices, because of their price and the limited
extent to which they might be bought on margin,
bank stocks are in great measure bought by rich
traders. But these issues became, at the later stages
of the panic, bargains in the counter market, sold
and bought through dealers in unlisted securities.
Being unlisted, they were especially subject to abnormal
 fluctuations. First National fell off on October
28th by $500 on the bid price, Bank of the Manhattan
Company by $150, and there were great losses in
such issues as Bank of America, Bank of United
States, Chase National, Chatham-Phenix, National
City, and Fifth Avenue—all standard bank securities.
 Trust Company and insurance shares lost
ground with the bank issues.
        <pb n="34" />
        The Stock Market Crash

9

It is significant that the bank stocks should have
fallen in price so rapidly, despite the fact that margin
requirements in these cases—although they are
usually bought outright—ranged from 50 to 80 per
cent. Presumably their fall signalized the distress
of wealthy operators.

The Big Market Drop
On the 29th, the day of heaviest trading, not only
for October but for all time, declines in a long list
of well-known shares ran from 25 to 40 points, some
of the highest grade shares showing losses from the
previous week’s closing figures ranging from 735 to
87 points. This outpouring of stocks, thrown on the
market regardless of price, came in the whirl of blind
panic. Many holders later found that they had incurred
 needless losses, while the buyers of the best of
these stocks, at the depth of market demoralization,
were fortunate indeed. It was manifest that many
and capacious strong-boxes had been emptied of their
contents in the midst of the hysteria of selling.
Speculative plungers sent in orders from every corner
of the land, and added to the chaos in this record
speculative panic of stock market history. The outsiders
 constituted an army of camp followers whose
number vastly exceeded those of the better disciplined
 army of Wall Street.
Favorable news made no impression on such a
débacle. In vain the United States Steel Corporation
 reported quarterly earnings with net receipts
in August, except for the preceding May, the largest
        <pb n="35" />
        10 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
of any month since the War, and, with its total for
the quarter, exceeded only in the preceding quarter.
The market had no ear for such news, because it was
deafened by the stentorian voices of banks calling
upon brokers and individuals to repay their loans,
while a Babel of brokers’ yells and customers’ bellows
 made the financial welkin resound like a supernatural
 jazz band. Deaf, blind, and dizzy, the mar:
ket fell, and then fell some more!
The groups of men and women who watched the
ticker tape unwind as their fortunes dwindled, or sat
dumbfounded in customers’ rooms before the board,
as their riches took wings, were the visible symbols
of silent thousands among the masses of the American
 people who had dumped their holdings into the
lap of the stock market Moloch. One touch of
nature had made the stock market trading world
kin, and the butcher or baker who had lost a few
stocks on margin drew the sympathy of millionaires
who had helped swell the enormous totals of
brokers’ loans and whose margin defenses had likewise
 been shattered.
Each day on the floor of the Stock Exchange the
tumult and the shouting rose to crescendos during the
five hours of market trading, dying only to rise again
as the avalanche of selling orders fell, carrying prices
down with them. Far out at sea the stock break
overworked the radio on the ocean liners, putting the
passengers into the Wall Street flurry. The crash in
the market cut short holidays as hundreds of Ameri-
        <pb n="36" />
        The Stock Market Crash

II

cans abruptly abandoned their plans for winter vacations
 and returned to New York in the hope of
salvaging something from the wreckage.
The sessions of the Stock Exchanges were cut
to three hours each on four week days, partly to
enable the overworked Exchange houses to catch up
with their transactions, but chiefly to put a check
upon further short selling and depression of the
market. A vigorous closing rally on October 30th
prefaced the strong and heartening rise in stock
prices on the 31st, when 10,727,320 shares were
traded and more than two and one-third billion dollars
 were regained by sixteen representative stocks.
The rally of Thursday, the 31st, continued until
noon, when the Exchange was closed for the balance
of the week to ease the strain. The Board
of Governors of the Stock Exchange announced
that it had “reached a point of complete physical
exhaustion.”

The market recesses gave time to count up the
losses in security values, and to gather from the
nation’s business, financial and governmental leaders
their opinions as to the probable causes and results
of the panic and what measures might be taken
to prevent a repetition of this painful ‘experience.


President Hoover called a series of conferences
with business and banking leaders at the White
House to devise ways and means of codrdinating the
efforts of private business and Government to pre-
        <pb n="37" />
        12 The Stock Market Crash—And After
vent the stock market panic from developing into
industrial crisis and depression.
From them all, from the President; from Thomas
W. Lamont, of J. P. Morgan &amp;amp; Company, leader
of the group of bankers meeting at the offices of the
House of Morgan, whose powerful support was
given to the rallying of the market; from Dr. Julius
Klein, Assistant Secretary of Commerce, who announced
 that the “stock market is not a major
barometer of business”; from every outstanding
leader competent to speak there came the reassuring
note that the commercial structure of the nation continued
 sound. By the banking group and other financial
 leaders, including John D. Rockefeller and John
D. Rockefeller, Jr., the level of stock prices was regarded
 as having swung too low during the panic,
and these rushed to the rescue of the market not only
with words but with huge buying orders. But these
orders arrived rather late to check the steep declines.
The Record of November
The sixty-day decline up to November 1 3th, when
“bottom” was touched, was without parallel in the
annals of Wall Street. There was the slaughter of
prices of November 7th, when United States Steel
opened off $7, General Electric off $6, Westinghouse
off $9, American Telephone off $5.25, American and
Foreign Power off $6, followed by a recovery and
turnover of 7,878,000 shares, at the rate of more
than 13,000,000 for a normal full-time session and
        <pb n="38" />
        The Stock Marke: Crash 13

with the tape seventy-two minutes behind the floor.
The banks gave support which helped the rally, while
blocks of from five thousand to seventy-five thousand
shares were thrown into the market.
It was on November 7th, that the National City
Bank Shareholders’ meeting rejected the terms of
the merger with the Corn Exchange Bank as proposed
 September 19th by the National City Directors
 and accepted by the Corn Exchange shareholders.
 By this proposed merger the creation of
the largest bank in the world had been announced.
The proposal had agreed on cash purchase by the
National City Bank at 360 of Corn Exchange shares
that had not been exchanged for National City stock.
The prices of Corn Exchange stock had fallen to
160 at the beginning of November.
But stocks broke again in a new rush to sell on
November 11th, with United States Steel at the
year’s low in an 1134 point drop to 1594 that was
succeeded by further declines on two successive days
and recorded losses of from one to twenty-five points
in other active issues. In the burst of liquidation
during the final hour of trading the market was overborne
 by the dead weight of realizing sales—manifestly
 representing “distress” selling carried over
from the October crisis. Still, call money and rates
on collateral time loans remained at 6 per cent, the
time-money rate being at its lowest since August,
1928. But leading stocks offered when there were
no buyers again encountered ‘‘air pockets.” The
        <pb n="39" />
        14 The Stock Market Crash—And After
first two hours’ trading on the 12th witnessed a turnover
 of 4,200,000 shares, and of 6,452,770 shares
in the three-hour market. On the following day,
November 13th, a renewed break in stocks under the
push of heavy trading occasioned the following comment
 by the financial editor of the New York Times:
“Yesterday's stock market calls for comment of a
different kind than was required on other recent days.
It pointed urgently to the exercise of financial common
 sense. The market’s character and the further
heavy break in prices (on transactions nearly twice
as large as Monday's) strongly suggested other selling
 than necessary liquidation [that is, ‘short’ selling].
 If the stocks which were pressed at a sacrifice
on yesterday's unreceptive market had actually all
represented ‘distress holdings’ taken over by strong
banks and individuals two weeks ago, then the man.
ner of marketing them yesterday would have been
most injudicious. It is a cardinal maxim of such
emergency relief that liquidation of shares thus taken
over should be cautious that it should be pursued in
close conformity with the state of the market; that
the stocks should never be thrown over hastily in
face of crumbling prices. A prudent holder, under
such conditions as yesterday, would not think of forcng
 them to a sale *

Plateau of Stock Prices Maintained
This comment might have referred to the conviction
 of a major bear raid in process. It is sig-
        <pb n="40" />
        The Stock Market Crash 15
nificant, that at this nadir of market despair and
panic the market “averages” had gone down only to
those of February, 1928—well above the old plateau
of stock market prices, from the level of which the
market had ascended after 1923. The worst panic
in history had not destroyed this new price plateau!
Industrial stock prices, even at the bottom on
November 13, 1929, were 30 per cent above 1926
average, and 300 per cent above the pre-war plateau
of 1905-1914! Despite the fact that the price level
of many stocks had run too high, the panic was
“technical” in its character and largely artificial.
This may be understood from the fact that industrial
 shares had achieved the highest earnings of
their history, that the price-earnings ratios were on
the average lower during 1929 than in 1928; and
that, in over-the-counter transactions, the powerful
National City Bank saw its shares sold off by 8o
points, opening around 280 and closing at 200.
Bank of New York and Trust closed down roo
points at 650; Guaranty Trust down 50 points at
560; Bankers’ Trust down 13 at 120; Corn Exchange
 down 20 at 165, and so on.
On November 14th, extraordinary measures were
taken. On this day came the announcement of the
Proposed cut in income tax, and the notice from
Washington of the conferences held at the White
House on November 13th. The rediscount rate at
the New York Federal Reserve Bank was lowered to
4%2 per cent, which came after a cut from 6 to z per
        <pb n="41" />
        16 ~~ The Stock Market Crash—And After
cent within a fortnight. A further reduction of
$710,000,000 in brokers’ loans was announced. The
brokers’ loan account showed an aggregate contrac
tion from the high level of October 2nd, of $2,632,-000,000
 and total borrowings at the lowest point
since June 15, 1928.
November 14th marked the point of rebound of
the market, with speculative leaders rallying by 2
to 14 points and utilities sharing in the further advances,
 in which merchandising shares also participated.
 My index of 225 listed industrial common
shares recorded the close on November 13th, as
down by 42 per cent from the September 3rd peak.

Beginnings of Recovery
The recovery from the panic began on the 14th
with further sweeping advances on the 15th, as the
comprehensive program engineered by President
Hoover for restoring confidence was being carried
on.
Many of the pivotal stocks had been “pegged,”
by the expedient of placing large standing orders for
substantial blocks at fixed prices. In the case of
United States Steel a bid was announced as a standing
 order for 200,000 shares at $150 a share. Certain
 interests, supposed to be the Rockefellers,
bought one million shares of Standard Oil of New
Jersey at so. The Wall Street market letters immediately
 blossomed with bullish predictions, accom.
panied by lists of stocks which, in the opinion of the
        <pb n="42" />
        The Stock Market Crash
firms issuing them, would show the best results for
the “long pull.”
Thereafter so-called ‘“normal” conditions prevailed
 in the stock market with stocks generally moving
 higher in steady trading, under the impetus of
optimistic reports from President Hoover's conference
 with railroad officials, business leaders, farm
leaders and the Governors of the states. These
assured the country that every department of the
nation’s business would proceed under normal or
augmented programs.
Open market values of listed stocks on the New
York Stock Exchange had fallen by $15,320,979,515
during October. The Stock Exchange statement for
December 1st shows the number of listed shares at
1,117,126,726, worth at market prices $63,589,338,-823.
 The loss in the market value of listed shares
during November was therefore $8,163,312,085—
about half of the previous loss during October.
From the peak of listed share values on September
 1st down to December 1st, the loss had been
$26,078,938,031, from $89,668,276,854 at the top.
The Commerciel and Financial Chronicle gives a
minimum estimate of $40,000,000,000 shrinkage of
total market values, which includes, of course, curb
and over-the-counter unlisted securities.
The ratio of member borrowings to listed share
values on December 1st was 6.32 per cent—the
lowest figure thus far on record. The previous low
was 8.06 per cent on September 1, 1927.

|
        <pb n="43" />
        18 The Stock Market Crash—And Afier
Members of the banking group had organized,
October 24th, to help stabilize conditions in the
market; these ceased their conferences after November
 13th, the spokesman for the group reporting that
the situation had been so far restored as to require
no further comment. During all this period money
rates in the stock market sank to levels below those
preceding the break, with every prospect that the
lower rediscount rate made by the Federal Reserve
Bank of New York would be followed by reductions
in European centers.
Hardly a month after the panic market “touched
bottom,” the market closed on December 1 1th, at a
level for industrial stocks and utilities 21 per cent
higher than on November 13th. But this was followed
 by a secondarv reaction, from which there
were distinct signs of recovery during the week ended
December 27th.
Except in the case of the coppers, this secondary
reaction failed to carry any group as low as the
bottom of the crash.
The following table, derived from my stock price
indexes, shows in the first column of figures the percentage
 at which the low point on the secondary reaction,
 during the week ended December 27th, stood
above the low point of the crash on November 13th.
The second column of figures is the percentage of
gain made later in the week of December 27th from
the bottom of the secondary reaction:
        <pb n="44" />
        The Stock Market Crash

Per Cent of
Secondary Low
Above Crash
Low

Group
All Industrials
1st Grade .
2nd Grade .
3rd Grade .
Preferreds . .
Public Utilities
Rails. . .
Steels .
Coppers .
Oils . .
Motors . . .
Auto Accessories .
Foods . . .
Stores . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous (All). . . .
All Bonds . . . . ow
* Below previous low during crash.

9.5
12.4
7-7
6.3
4.8
9.5
B.5
5-3
2.3%
7.0
8.2
2.1
9.5
i1.3
10.5
1.7

Per cent
Advance from
Secondary
Low
3.6
4.1
3.3
3.7
0.1
3.2
2.4
3.9
3.6
2.8
5.5
5.7
2.0
3.2
3.8
0.0

19

By the close of 1929, therefore, the extent of the
panic and its immediate after-effects could be gauged.
With fair business prospects, it seemed justifiable to
look for a rising trend in the stock market.
Foreign stock exchanges reacted sympathetically
with the American market. My index of French
stock prices shows a comparatively moderate rise
from early January (167.2) to early September
(179.6) and then relative to the American crash a
moderate fall to the end of November (134.1). My
index for Germany showed relatively less fluctuation
than our own stock price level, being 117.6, 108.9,
        <pb n="45" />
        20 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

and 83.5, respectively, at the dates named. English
stock prices, however, had fallen pretty consistently
since the first of 1929, going from 198.9 in the week
ended January rith to 167.3 at the end of August,
and 91.4 at the end of December, a decline by more
than one-half in a year. No doubt the London
decline, setting in much earlier than our own, helped
give the American crash in stock prices its initial
:mpulse.
In fact, the British crash, dating from August 30
and starting a full week earlier than the American
break, plunged common share averages to a lower
level on the London Exchange than in New York
(see Chart 5). The extreme range of the American
decline was 16 per cent less than the fall of stocks in
London. It was a world crash in stocks which
started, not in New York. but in London, and
wrought havoc in Paris and Berlin as well as on the
American Exchanges.
        <pb n="46" />
        CHAPTER II

PRESIDENT HOOVER ACTS

IT was but natural to expect that so stupendous a
crash, with a reduction in listed values of twentysix
 billions of dollars, would deal a tremendous blow
to business. But business was more scared than hurt.
By convocation of the President, and under the
auspices of the United States Chamber of Commerce,
four hundred leading business men set up in Washington,
 December 5, 1929, a committee of seventytwo
 “key” men called the National Business Advisory
Council. This committee set about devising means
for a continuing organization to stabilize business.
At its meeting President Hoover defined three possible
 lines of emergency action.
The first step, Mr. Hoover said, was to recover
business confidence by the powerful aid of the Fed.
eral Reserve System and the strong position of the
banks. These were working steadily to diminish interest
 rates. Money released by the deflation of
securities would thus be returned into business. The
President noted the effect of this action in making
money more abundant in all parts of the country and
in strengthening the bond market, in which public
issues that had been postponed were beginning to
appear.
The second step was taken by the President him-
        <pb n="47" />
        22 The Stock Market Crash—And After

self. Through personal interviews and public conferences
 with leading employers he sought to set
standards whereby, so far as they were concerned,
there would be no movement to reduce wages. Corresponding
 assurance was obtained from the leaders
of organized labor that they would help allay conflicts
 in full cooperation with employers, avoiding all
issues that involved wage increases. By this cooperation
 between Capital and Labor, continuity in consumer’s
 purchasing power was assured, with the removal
 of fear of general unemployment. This would
not, of course, increase consumers’ purchasing power,
except to some extent through possible changes in
distribution of products among workers, managers,
enterprises and capitalists. The point was that purchasing
 power would be kept from decreasing
through any serious stoppage of the wheels of
industry.
The third step was of a more permanent nature.
[In the President's words, it was to ‘‘undertake,
through voluntary organization of industry, the continuity
 and expansion of the construction and maintenance
 work of the country, so as to take up any
slack in employment which arises in other directions.”
The President continued :
“The greatest tool which our economic system
affords for the establishment of stability is the construction
 and maintenance work, the improvements
and betterments and general clean-up of plants in
preparation for cheaper production and the increased
demand of the future.
        <pb n="48" />
        President Hoover Acts 23

“It has long been agreed by both business men
and economists that this great field of expenditure
could, by acceleration in time of need, be made into
a great balance wheel of stability. It is agreed that
its temporary speeding up to absorb otherwise idle
labor brings great subsequent benefits and no liabilities.

“A very considerable part of our wage earners
are employed, directly and indirectly, in construction
and the preparation and transportation of its material.
 In the inevitable periods when the demand
for consumable goods increases and labor is fully
employed, the construction and maintenance can
slacken and we actually gain in stability. No one
would advocate the production of consumable goods
beyond the daily demands that in itself only stirs up
future difficulty.” The President further reported:
“Our railways and utilities and many of our
larger manufacturers have shown a most distinguished
 spirit in undertaking to maintain and even
to expand their construction and betterment program.
 The state, county and municipal governments
are responding in the most gratifying way to the
request to cooperate with the Federal Government
in every prudent expansion of public works. Much
construction work had been postponed during the
Past few months by reason of the shortage of mortgage
 money due to the diversion of capital to speculative
 purposes, which should soon be released.”
The purpose of the conference, the President
stated, was to systematize this movement in all
        <pb n="49" />
        24 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

branches of the industrial world. The assurances
already obtained by the public service institutions
and the governmental works would be a prime factor
of stability by enabling construction and maintenance
activities for 1930 to reach a ‘“‘higher level than that
of 1929.” A second great balance wheel of stability,
the President said, was in our foreign trade. But
he cautioned that exports should be mainly for
development work abroad, such as roads and utilities
which increase the standards of living of the foreign
nations and thus increase demand for goods from
every nation.
Finally, the President declared that all these
efforts had but one end, namely, to “assure employment¥and
 to remove the fear of unemployment.”
First Concerted Action Against Depression
The remedies and preventives proposed to the
four hundred business leaders represented the first
concerted effort made in this country by government
and business to avoid threatened depression. “A
more significant experiment in the technique of balance,”
 Professor Wesley C. Mitchell declared in a
paper before the Taylor Society, December 4, 1929,
“could not be devised than the one which is being
performed before our eyes.”
The purpose of this action was magnificent. Its
psychological application in allaying fear was,
indeed, swiftly effective. It immediately turned the
attention of the nation from despairing contemplation
 of losses to a confident preparation for quick
recovery. It was designed to head off industrial con-
        <pb n="50" />
        President Hoover Acts

25

flicts. It attempted to assure producers of a continuance
 of purchasing power for their goods, and
consumers continued maintenance of their standard
of living. Finally, it took a step in the direction of
“planned and managed prosperity,” indicated as
proper in the temporary speeding up of forward
construction and expansion programs and stimulation
 of foreign trade.
Whether this supplied the necessary driving power
to overcome the momentum of forces that were
already turning the volume of production and trade
downward with a decline in the general level of
prices, remains to be seen. Its underlying theory,
that continuity of the productive and distributive
process, and hence of the purchasing power of the
masses of consumers was of prime importance to
reassure business and maintain the continuous flow
of production and trade is altogether sound. It was
calculated to mend as speedily as possible the dislocation
 occasioned by the transfer of the mass of
traded stock issues to alien and more concentrated
ownership at a loss to their former holders. It was
a proper emergency measure to take in preventing
the worst effects on business from the crash in the
stock exchanges.
Henry Ford was substantially right, therefore, in
a supplemental statement issued by him after the
first of the President’s conferences, when he suggested
 the need, in order to check such effect in its
beginnings and as a measure of reassurance, of “increasing
 the purchasing power of our principal customers—the
 American people.” Mr. Ford added:
        <pb n="51" />
        26 ~~ The Stock Market Crash—And After

“This may be done in two ways: first, by putting
additional value into goods or reducing prices to the
level of actual values, and, second, starting a movement
 to increase the general wage level. Nearly
everything in this country is too high priced. The
only thing that should be high priced in this country
is the man who works. Wages must not come down,
they must not even stay on their present level; they
must go up.”
It may or may not be true that all goods at a
given time are too high priced—probably it is not
true; it may not be true that prices should be reduced,
until costs are reduced; but it is true that the cost of
production should be reduced all the time, with consequent
 enhancement of profits and of consumer
income. It may be added that Mr. Ford “made
good” upon his words by reducing the prices of his
product to the public and increasing the wages of his
employees, thus at once showing what might be done
by the leader of our greatest industry and manifesting
 his confidence in the underlying factors of business.


But if consumer purchasing power were the desideratum,
 some method had to be devised for stimulating
 payments to workers by industries both in
large-scale and small-scale production. Not all of
these industries were in the fortunate circumstances
of Mr. Ford’s, which had benefited by intensive
economies and consequent rapid reduction of unit
costs. The problem was to benefit the wage earners
in the whole gamut of American industries, big and
        <pb n="52" />
        President Hoover Acts

27

little, engaged in all forms of production down to
and including the retail trades, and including some
backward industries like coal and textiles. How
might this universal stimulus be applied?

Features of the Business Conference
It could not be done merely by conventions and
their resolutions. Julius H. Barnes, who as Chairman
 of the Board of the United States Chamber of
Commerce marshalled the National Business Survey
Conference, defined, on December 6, 1929, outstanding
 factors concerning this conference, as follows:
 “First, that it presented an extraordinary and
competitive cross section of the whole fabric of
American business represented by leaders, who could
speak with conviction and the authority of proved
leadership in their lines.
“Second, that in taking up any possible slack in
wages and employment, an elasticity of new construction
 and of maintenance is the chief factor; and
that maintenance, which means new equipment, and
construction, which means not only expansion but
improvement of mechanical production and distribution,
 are naturally justified.
“Third, that this implies large capital expenditures
 for these purposes, and this must be provided
from industrial treasuries, or, most largely, by borrowings
 for capital investment.
“Fourth, these borrowings depend upon the ability
 to obtain money at reasonable rates and in ready
and adequate quantity. This situation has devel-
        <pb n="53" />
        28 The Stock Market Crash—And After
oped rapidly in the last few weeks, so that this
assurance is present. This is shown by the Treasury
refunding today of $325,000,000 at 314 per cent,
against its last borrowings at 47 per cent, not
long ago. This is probably the most extraordinary
 change ever recorded in Treasury operations
between transactions.
“Fifth, that industry, in being assured of available
capital requires then only the vision and courage to
proceed.”
The temporary speeding of public works does not
mean merely assurance of increased employment in
the cement, steel and building industries. Manifestly
 there could be no wholesale transfer of the
unemployed from shops and unrelated industries
into building, even though that building were distributed
 throughout the states.
But buildings have to be furnished. Architects
and their staffs are employed. The makers of office
furnishing, plumbing and other building equipment
feel the fresh demand and take on new help.
Housing is stimulated. The furniture dealers, carpet
 and rug makers, hardware dealers, radio and
washing machine makers, and numberless other contributors
 to house furnishings feel the stimulus of
new demands and add to their pay rolls. The workmen
 in all these industries promptly spend their
added total of wages for food, shelter and clothing,
so that very quickly the vivifying impulse of new
capital outlays is felt in all branches of industry
and trade.
These outlays might be made directly from the
        <pb n="54" />
        President Hoover Acts 29

large reserves of our leading industries, which had
providently plowed-back into surpluses from their
expanded earnings of recent years. It could be
provided by new public and private issues of securities,
 especially of bonded securities.
For this purpose, Chairman Barnes points out,
vast credits are available to such extent that money
rates have gone down. Until confidence is fully
restored and business is again in full volume there
should be the certainty that our credit structure
will be more than equal to the extensions demanded.
That should tide the country over the period of
dislocation. But it might be objected that interest
and sinking fund payments would soon become due
on the added bond issues—installment payments on
the country’s added circulation of purchasing power
which will add to public and private burdens.
But these burdens can be better carried if the
dislocation produced by the panic is prevented from
destroying real values in enforced idleness and
depreciation of plant and product, unemployment,
and business stagnation.
Of course added public and private expenditures
in emergencies must be controlled in such manner
that new credit issues shall not increase faster than
the supply of goods. The aim should be an increase
in real income; that is, the distribution of greater
quantities of goods on a stable level of prices. To
achieve this dynamic balance on an expanding program
 requires the codrdination of data from many
sources in indexes of production, trade, employment
 and consumption. It will require the coordi-
        <pb n="55" />
        30 The Siock Market Crash—dAnd After
nate action of many men and business bodies. It
will take time. So that the effect of the President's
action cannot, in the nature of things, be soon observable,
 except as a measure of reassurance. Ultimately
 the present governmental and banking agencies
 created for the purpose of systematizing data,
together with the statistical organizations of private
companies, may suffice to supply information continuously,
 of a kind that will enable business to
achieve and maintain a better equilibrium. In that
case President Hoover's expansion program may
be turned over to these established agencies when
the emergency is past.
This, apparently, was the President's purpose in
his announcement that the National Business Advisory
 Council would function only as a temporary
body. Through his entire experience as Secretary
of Commerce and in the war years as Food Administrator
 and organizer of relief abroad, Mr. Hoover
has found that the method of voluntary codperation
between government and business for the meeting
of national emergencies is entirely dependable. No
new government bureaus are necessary. Business
leaders and labor leaders by codperating with each
other and the government have the power to stabilize
 production and consumption. If this great
experiment in codperation succeeds—even though
other elements of stability will have had the deciding
 influence in the emergency of the panic of 1929
—a new victory for industrial democracy will be
achieved.
        <pb n="56" />
        CHAPTER III

CAUSES OF THE PANIC

WHAT were the causes of the panic of 1929?
That the stock market crash was “primarily precipitated
 by foreign liquidation” is the view expressed
by John S. Sinclair in the New York Times of
October 27th. This liquidation accompanied the socalled
 Hatry Panic on the London Stock Exchange,
which resulted in a deeper fall of the London stock
price level—45.4 per cent from August 30th to
December 27th, according to the British index—than
occurred on the New York Stock Exchange between
the high point on September 7th and the bottom of
November 13th. Few realize today that the
greatest fall of stocks in British history, comparable
only with the Baring Panic of 1890, preceded and
was an actuating cause of the American panic, and
that a coincident fall in Paris and Berlin accompanied
 the British liquidation. It began with the
failure of the banking house of Clarence Hatry in
August, followed by his arrest in September and
subsequent conviction for a gigantic forgery of stock
certificates. This started the British liquidation in
London and in New York. Barron's W eekly of
        <pb n="57" />
        32 The Stock Market Crash—And After
December 9th, notes that Britons were extremely
active in “distributing” stocks at the high level in
New York during September, as seen by the movement
 in sterling exchange. It adds:
“Between September 24th and October 24th,
sterling swung virtually all the way from our goldimport
 point to our gold-export point—an astounding
 reversal for so brief a period. On September
24th sterling was slightly under $4.85; on October
24th, it was above $4.88. This skyrocketting of
sterling occurred at a season when it is normally
very weak.
“No one knows what volume of British withdrawals
 from Wall Street would be required to send
up sterling in this spectacular fashion. Probably no
important branch of statistics is so weak as those
pertaining to foreign-exchange volume. Maybe
$300,000,000 would do it; maybe $800,000,000
would be necessary.”
There had been a coincident rapid decline of
stock prices on the Berlin and Paris exchanges. In
Berlin stocks had declined with little interruption
since early in 1928. The liquidation on all three of
the principal European exchanges no doubt contributed
 in important degree to the overthrow of the
American stock market, and was largely responsible
for the September liquidation in New York, with its
tremendous growth of brokers’ loans, partly to take
up the holdings relinquished by foreigners. Indeed,
there were indications that foreign liquidation in
Wall Street persisted into 1930,
        <pb n="58" />
        © Irving Fisher

08

STOCK PRICE INDEXES
a

*
/\ 1
4

LONDON

A

JS WAS

Of

an FL

9%

MONTHLY

DATA

120%

WEEKLY DATA

oe

CHART 5.—At the bottom of the crashes on the London, New
York, Paris, and Berlin Stock Exchanges the percentages of fall
in common shares from the (weekly) highs before the crashes
were: London, 45 per cent fall; New York, 38 per cent; Paris,
26 per cent; and Berlin, 23 per cent.

53
        <pb n="59" />
        34 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

Linking of Commercial and Investment Banks
Mr. H. Parker Willis, editor of the New York
Journal of Commerce, ascribes to the big commercial
 banks, which had organized speculative pools
in the form of investment companies, a causal relation
 to the crash. I am informed by a country
banker in Connecticut that there was a tendency
among small banks to copy the big banks in the organization
 of these investment pools which helped
swell the wave of speculation through the country.
The big banks, of course, used the funds of
their stockholders in speculation under intelligent
guidance; the little banks could have no such expert
guidance. But in either case there was abuse. The
commercial banks are supposed to conduct their
operations under close public regulation, but by
means of affiliated investment companies, joined as
closely as Siamese twins, they have been enabled to
act irresponsibly, as is evidenced by the fact that
these companies publish no statements and are held
to accounting by no public body.

Overvaluation of Common Stocks
That the prime cause was serious overvaluation
of common stocks that had previously been undervalued
 is the opinion of Mr. Carl Snyder, of the
Federal Reserve Bank of New York. In correspondence
 with me Mr. Snyder says, referring to
the war inflation of commodity prices:
“The long-sustained rise in the level of commodity
        <pb n="60" />
        Causes of the Panic

35

prices necessarily brought a huge increase in the earnings
 of common shares, and this naturally forced a
valorization of these shares in terms of something
like a 57-cent dollar.
“On the basis of this higher price level, stocks,
through, say, the 1919-1924 period, were, as now
seems clear, seriously undervalued. As soon as public
 confidence in the rate of earnings was established,
there began a movement of revalorization that naturally
 swung to wild extremes, as stock markets always
do. With this came a recurrence of the familiar ‘new
era’ theory, which seems to blossom about once in
a generation with unfailing regularity. All this
brought what appears to have been as serious an
overvaluation of common stocks as they had previously
 been undervalued—overvalued, I should say,
because it is clear that we have as yet seen no-readjustment
 of long-term interest rates and bond yields
to what look like permanently lower levels. And
would not this be inevitable if the high prices
attained by the average of stocks were to continue?”
It is not clear why long-term interest rates and
bond yields should seek “permanently lower levels”
—they might properly remain at permanently higher
levels, if, because of increases in science and the
arts, the “tempo” of business justifies expectation of
higher profits and greater real income. But it seems
measurably true that common stocks were overvalued
 precedent to the crash, and that this overvaluation
 was one of its immediate factors. There
is a measure of truth, also, in the judgment pro-
        <pb n="61" />
        36 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
nounced by another financial expert, who contributes
this statement:

Business Recession
“In my opinion the basic change was in the business
 curve and outlook. After nearly two and onehalf
 years of advance at the rate of 1 per cent per
month, in July of 1929 business turned downward,
and it became evident that a business recession was
in prospect. When prices were as high relative to
earnings as they were in 1929, the recession outlook
pulls the props from the stock market. The profit
outlook had changed fundamentally. There were
other causes that had been present for a year or
more, but these had not broken the market. This
downward turn in the business trend was the one
new factor in the picture.”
With this view the following statement by
Mr. Lindsay Bradford, Vice President of the City
Bank Farmers Trust Company of New York, is
accordant:
“Since early in 1929 considerable liquidation and
distribution of stocks of various industries had been
going on, and but little notice of it was taken due
to the fact that the strength in certain other groups,
such as the utilities, and certain outstanding industrials
 gave the whole market the appearance of such
strength. This feature of the market was indicated
during the Fall by the fact that when certain stocks
were daily making new highs other groups were
daily making new lows in the weeks before the
        <pb n="62" />
        Causes of the Panic
panic ensued. The reason, it seems to me, that
these groups, such as notably the automobile group,
were weak was because as early as last June it was
apparent that automobile buying was falling off and
that the automobile companies as a whole were running
 into overproduction. Similar weaknesses in
the building situation were apparent in the early
summer and it is such fundamentals as these which,
in my opinion, were the real reasons for the decline
in prices.”

Decision on Edison Company Stock-Split
An important factor which contributed to bringing
 about the fall in prices, was the refusal of the
Public Service Commission of the State of Massachusetts
 to permit the Edison Company of Boston
to split its stock. The statements made in connec
tion with this pointed to the high prices at which
public utility securities were selling and the relationship
 which existed between earnings and market
prices. Of course, the payment of stock dividends
on these somewhat inflated stocks did tend to add
to unhealthy speculation. The Public Service Commission's
 refusal to permit it further, discouraged
the holders of public utility stocks in venturing to
bid prices higher and so contributed to the break.

Tax on Capital Gains

The Federal law imposing a tax on capital gains
helped bring on the panic. This resulted from overextension
 on the part of borrowers, largely induced
        <pb n="63" />
        38 The Stock Market Crash—And After
by their holding of stocks at the height of the
market.
For years the tax law on capital gains had discouraged
 the taking of profits on securities because
their holders were unwilling to sell and pay the tax
liabilities incurred; instead, they made new stock
purchases, as occasion proved favorable, on borrowed
money. The resultant rapid piling up of margin
accounts during 1929 put the market in bad techni.
cal position, making it vulnerable to bear attacks.
Thus the capital gains tax operated to prevent
outright selling and buying of stocks. It stimulated
holders to enlarge their margin accounts because
their own funds were locked up in held securities,
thus subjecting them to the risks that finally overthrew
 the market.
Nobody profited by this situation. The banks
were burdened with the frozen credits of their customers,
 in the loans on collateral which they had
taken over. The entire body of security holders
suffered panic decline in the prices of their securities.
The government reaped no revenue from the tax on
securities, rather, it suffered losses in its income tax
account because of the gigantic deflation of the
market. A special warning on this subject was issued
by the National City Bank of New York, as far back
as April of 1929. This statement found in the capital
 gains tax a root factor in the overextension of
borrowings on the stock exchange which had led to
a vulnerable credit situation. It said:
“If one could check up on the people leaning on
        <pb n="64" />
        Causes of the Panic

39

borrowed money for the carrying of securities, it
would be found that there are an overwhelming
aumber of holders, who, because of this tax, do not
sell. In our daily experience we find it common
that men who are holding securities and desire to
purchase additional securities in the market which
they consider as having an intrinsic value in excess
of the market price, do not feel that they can sell
that which they have, but in the satisfaction of this
desire they borrow either through their brokers or
directly through their bankers funds necessary for
such purposes, thereby placing added burden on the
credit structure.”
This tax on profits on the sale of stocks, bonds,
real estate, and so on, was put into the original
income tax law in 1913. It had no proper part in
such a law, for the simple reason that profits on
such sales represent a growth in capital, not a growth
in income. In successive annual reports, Secretary
Mellon had repeatedly called attention to the fact
that such taxes hinder and prevent business transactions
 which would otherwise take place. If the
law were repealed the loss in revenue would be, in
a degree, counterbalanced by the encouragement
which repeal would give to turning into real profits
the paper profits on securities as fast as they accrue.
These real profits might then be added to the capital
fund of taxpayers, and put to work earning more
money that would be taxable.
Even during the calendar year 1927, when the
long bull market was rising fast, the revenue from
        <pb n="65" />
        40 The Stock Market Crash—And After

sale of capital assets including stocks, bonds and
real estate, amounted to less than 10 per cent of
total reported individual and corporate incomes. In
any event the government would have had little
to lose and much to save, by successful agitation for
the repeal of this law.
During and after the panic the Treasury Department
 recommended that Congress reduce income
taxes during 1930—a one per cent cut on both personal
 and corporation incomes. The department
stated that total ordinary receipts of the government
 for the current fiscal year through November
 20, were $119,000,000 larger than for the
corresponding period of 1928; total ordinary expenditures,
 on the other hand, had been reduced by
$107,000,000. This amply permitted a tax cut, with
a saving of $160,000,000 a year. It was stated that
a further cut of the tax on capital gains, or its repeal,
would assure the government against such losses in
revenue as were sustained by reason of the fall in
stock prices during 1929. In fact, during ordinary
years the losses in revenue (allowed to the extent of
12% per cent on capital net loss from sale of real
estate, stocks and bonds, other than loss from sale
of assets held more ‘than two years) ran into the
millions. Thus the Statistics of Income for 1927
states this amount to be $227,878,965. This factor
of establishment of loss for income tax purposes
tended to hold the stock market down after the
crash. Great volumes of securities were sent into the
market after the bottom was touched on November
        <pb n="66" />
        Causes of the Panic

41

13th to establish such losses, with the intent later
of buying back the same securities or securities of
the same class. So the capital gains tax operated
both to bring on the crash and then to prevent the
recovery of prices following the panic.

Excessive Credits

Craig B. Hazlewood, President of the American
Bankers’ Association, in his address before that
body, October 1, 1929, maintained that the market
values of securities on the New York Stock Exchange
had increased too heavily “after allowing for
increases in the number of units listed.” Total
values, he said, increased from sixty and one-half billion
 dollars January 1, 1925, to one hundred and
twenty-four billion dollars on July 1, 1929. Mr.
Hazlewood named as a blamable cause the increased
volume of credit allowances by the bankers of the
country which had been employed in carrying stocks
to those higher levels. These allowances, he said,
amounted to “too large a portion of the available
credit of the country.”
In considering increase in listed values, it is proper
to recall the $12,000,000,000 of sterling bonds listed
in the spring of 1928 which is included in this total.
Only a few millions of these bonds were actually
distributed in this country.
Doubtless it is true that the increase of credit
allowances was too great. This is because the
enlarged credit structure was altogether too susceptible
 to bear raids—not so much because it boosted
        <pb n="67" />
        42 The Stock Market Crash—And After

prices too high or that it materially diminished the
availability of credit in commercial and industrial
business, as that investors were overextending themselves
 on margins. True, overextension of credit
raised prices somewhat. Without any overextension,
however, such prices might still have risen nearly
though not quite so high.
[t should be added that up to the time of the
panic there had been no great complaint from business
 circles on account of lack of credits, except in
the case of the building industry. It has seemed
to me an open question how far such building recession
 as we have had in 1929 was caused by curtailment
 of credits, and how far by overbuilding. But
funds had been withdrawn from building and loan
associations and from banks and other sources of
mortgage loans, attracted by the higher rates of
call and time loans for financing stock exchange
transactions. Even so, it would seem that means
might have been devised, from the ample credit
resources of the Federal Reserve System, to accommodate
 the building industry as well as the stock
market without curtailing the upward course of
stock prices. The efforts of the Federal Reserve
System to make money dear in the stock market
tended to make it dear in the real estate market as
well, despite their desire to avoid such effects.

Stock Market Loans by Others Than Banks
The American Bankers’ Association in its resoluion
 demanding an inquiry into the whole subject of
        <pb n="68" />
        Causes of the Panic

43

brokers’ 10ans, laid its finger on another actuating
cause of the break in these words:
“Industries had been financing working capital
more and more through the issuance of securities,
and this has resulted in a slower growth of commercial
 bank loans and a more rapid growth of loans
against securities, together with a holding of idle
funds periodically by many industries.”
These idle funds naturally sought employment at
the high rates which the stock market afforded as a
consequence of the restrictive policy of the banks.
The resolution of the American Bankers’ Association
speaks of the resultant total of so-called brokers’
loans as a “spectacular figure, whereas it should be
scientific figure.” As a spectacular figure, this
reflected stock market fluctuations that were'unsound
and detrimental to the public good. The resolution
adds that it leads to ‘‘threats of financial legislation,
 which if carried out, might be even more
harmful.”

Were Investors Sold Out Rather Than Selling?
The Commercial and Financial Chronicle (of
November 9, 1929) takes issue with myself and
others who have believed that the stock market had
attained a permanently high plateau-—not, be it
understood, a permanently high peak—above all
previous plateaus of stock prices. “In the last
analysis,” the Chronicle said, “the break in the
market was due to the fact that stocks had been
carried to absurdly high levels.” Moreover, the
        <pb n="69" />
        44 The Stock Market Crash—And After
fall in the market was not due to mob psychology,
but “rather, the mob held on to the last minute
with the greatest tenacity and finally got sold out
instead of selling out.”
There may be some substance in this view. But
the testimony of market operators does not seem
to bear out the assertion in any absolute sense.
There was the fear of course, on the part of brokerage
 houses that made them sell their customers’
stock to protect themselves. But if the Commercial
and Financial Chronicle be right in its contention,
then there was no panic at all, since in a panic the
mob psychology of fear predominates in the manner
illustrated by a run on a bank when every one strives
to draw out his funds before the rest; or a panic
in a burning theater, where each tries to get out
first.

Federal Reserve Policy
The Commercial and Financial Chroncile also
suggested that the market had been sent on a new
upward journey by Federal Reserve action during
the early part of August, 1929, in sanctioning an
increase in the New York Federal Reserve discount
rate from § per cent to 6 per cent, with simultaneous
 lowering of the buying rate for bankers’ acceptances
 and the concurrent purchase of acceptances
on a large scale. This, the Chronicle says, ‘meant
the forcing out of reserve credit by the act of
the Reserve System itself, and involved Federal
        <pb n="70" />
        Causes of the Panic
Reserve inflation of a peculiarly objectionable
type.”

15

Bear Tactics and Outside Calling of Loans
The Chronicle assigned yet other causes to
the panic:
“The latter part of September, however, some
of the large groups of operators, having accomplished
 their purpose in carrying prices to new
extremes, began unloading their holdings, and this
had the effect of weakening the market . . . but
after the decline had been going on for several
weeks, there came an entirely new development,
namely, the calling of loans on a huge scale, not by
the banks themselves, but by the mongrel crowd of
outside lenders.”
The first was doubtless true; stocks passed from
strong to weak holders. The second, the withdrawal
of funds in many cases came from the banks first,
which caused outside lenders and brokers to call
their loans. It soon lost most of its significance
in the fact that by this time the demand also fell
off; if the supply of funds had been cut off more
than the demand, money rates would have risen
and they did not.

Margins Not Figured Scientifically
A series of causes of the panic was described by
Fred I. Kent, Director of the Bankers’ Trust Company
 of New York in his address before the Ameri-
        <pb n="71" />
        46 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
can Acceptance Council in New York, November 11,
1929. Mr. Kent found one valid cause in the fact
that margins were not sufficiently large to protect
borrowers: :
“If the base value of securities upon which margins
 are figured had been at a point slightly below
attractive investment prices measured by the interest
value of current earnings against prices, is it not
probable that the tragedy of those who were sold
out would have been avoided?” Although there
were stocks selling below even these margin requirements,
 this plan would have helped, since it would
have meant larger margins and better technical position
 of the market. But it should be borne in mind
that margins were actually higher than before in
the history of Wall Street, during this inflation
period. Paradoxically, the situation was helped
during the crash by reducing margins to 25 per cent
of the market value of stocks.
An economist who has made a special study
of the subject says: “Stock Exchange member
 margins were actually very ample. Statistics
covering the first six months of 1929 showed that
the average Stock Exchange house was maintaining
40 per cent margins on customers’ securities carried,
65 per cent margins on customers’ debit balances, and
the members’ collateral loans were margined with
excess collateral to the extent of about 50 per cent.
Naturally, no margin can protect the borrower from
the price declines. The purpose of a margin is, of
course, to protect lenders rather than borrowers.
        <pb n="72" />
        Causes of the Panic 47

Undoubtedly, the decline in prices was accompanied
by, and in part caused by, heavy selling out of
accounts after more margins had been demanded.
But without extensive outright liquidation, a panic
would not have occurred.”

Fear About the Tariff
Many will take seriously Mr. Kent's further contention
 that the market fell because of fear engendered
 in the public mind by the action of the coalition
 bloc in Congress in connection with the tariff
bill. In the panicky condition of the market everything
 added to its fears. But big business had no
reason to fear any fall of the tariff and little fear
of harm if it were not raised. Representatives of
the automobile industry, the country’s largest industry,
 told the President that they wished lower tariff
Protection for their products, some of them even
saying that absolute removal of the tariff would
not disturb them. No doubt business was disturbed
by failure to decide the tariff question, quite irrespective
 of its merits. It might be argued that fears
both of a higher and of a lower tariff hurt business.
In any case the tariff is today not a small element in
the calculations of the business of the country generally.
 Mr. Kent is not a lone voice crying in the
speculative wilderness when he says: “As soon as
dealers in securities who were constantly on the watch
for indications as to business changes, realized that
this feeling of uneasiness (on account of the tariff
bill) was spreading throughout industry, they began
        <pb n="73" />
        48 The Stock Market Crash—And After
selling stocks.” But it was the dilatoriness of the
Senate, not the need of a higher tariff, that hurt
business.
Undigested Securities
Mr. Kent presents a most interesting view of the
situation in his comment upon the proportion of
national income that went into brokers’ loans during
1929. He figures that 914 per cent of the national
income is the normal amount available for new
securities and increased savings deposits, and that
something over five and one-half billion dollars was
“all that could be utilized for investment purposes.”
He goes on to state that the new security issues of
the first three quarters of 1929 amounted to nearly
eight and one-half billion, or $2,800,000,000 more
than the five and one-half billion which he calculates
as available from national income during this period.
This amounted to 20 per cent of the national income,
as contrasted with the “normal” of 914 per cent.
Hence, he concludes, new securities had been created
and issued more rapidly than the public could absorb
them. The only way they could do so was by overextending
 themselves.
But in this calculation Mr. Kent may not have
taken account of the securities issued by investment
trusts. These securities were not really new, but
merely old securities in the form of new certificates.
The same may be said of the multiplying mergers
of 1929; every investor in a merger reduces his
investment in the constituent companies exactly as
much as he increases it in the merger. The same
        <pb n="74" />
        Causes of the Panic

49

is substantially true of investment trust issues—
although the investment trusts withheld their purchases
 of stocks immediately before the panic, thus
contributing to the fall in prices.
But it is a fact, and an important one, that new
investment trust securities had been created and
issued more rapidly, at least, than these securities
could be fully substituted; many were not yet listed on
the Stock Exchange so as to become as readily negotiable
 as the securities they had displaced. By some
fatality the crash seemed to be exactly so timed that
many people with plenty of collateral could not use
it because it consisted temporarily of investment
trust certificates unlisted and non-liquid. That this
factor played a part was evidenced by the fact that
in the panic many investment trust securities which,
a few weeks before, were selling above their liquidation
 value, thus capitalizing the investment trust
management, came to sell below liquidation value;
that is, the constituent stocks held by these investment
 trusts were worth more than the titles to them
in the form of the trust’s certificates.

Gold Withdrawals
Yet another point is suggested by George E. Roberts,
 Vice President of the National City Bank, in
his address at the December, 1929, meeting of the
New York Academy of Political Science. Mr. Roberts
 notes that the export of half a billion of gold
during 1927 and 1928, while influencing the attitude
of the banks, “did not command the attention it
        <pb n="75" />
        50 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
deserved from the speculative public.” This, he
says, resulted in the New York City banks withdrawing
 their support of the growing account of
brokers’ loans from October, 1927, to October,
1929, which in turn resulted in the market depending
 more and more upon the irresponsible loans “for
others,” these “others” meaning business concerns
having large loanable funds. This constituted an
element of instability. On this subject a correspondent
 comments anonymously as follows:
“I feel that the money market aspects of the
panic, as far as they arose from the large amount
of loans by other lenders, cannot be dissociated
from the previous open market policy of the Federal
Reserve System, which, through establishing artificially
 tight money conditions, raised the rate on call
loans and attracted other lenders’ funds into them.”

Overextension of Loans
Another bankers’ view is represented by M. H.
Cahill, President of the Plaza Trust Company of
New York, and formerly President of the New York
State Bankers’ Association. Mr. Cahill says in the
Manufacturers’ Record of Baltimore (issue of
November, 1929): “Every banker in the country
had, for several months previous to the break in
the market, been demanding from 40 per cent to
100 per cent margins on collateral loans. This fact
in itself was conclusive evidence that the banker
knew that the stocks he was accepting as security
for loans were priced at fictitious levels. Under
        <pb n="76" />
        Causes of the Panic

§1

the policy pursued, he was forced, of course, to
insist upon an excessive margin for every loan in
order to insure at least a sound margin of safety
in the event that a collapse did take place.” Thus
Mr. Cahill finds that “the real major cause of the
collapse was the rash and reckless purchasing of
fictitious values on credit.”
Doubtless bankers thought they knew that stocks
were being priced at fictitious levels, although the
evidence on which they thought so is subject to
review and critical analysis. All that they really
knew was that stocks had risen rapidly. Undoubtedly
 bankers were justified in taking alarm, not so
much over the rapidly advancing prices of securities,
as because of the vast number and amount of borrowings
 of banks on collateral or of borrowing with
brokers as intermediaries, as reflected in the huge
totals of margin accounts. Because of this manifest
Overextension on the part of thousands of borrowers,
 the banks were right in demanding high
collateral. It is tragically true, whether or not the
high level of stock prices was justified, that bankers
all over the country, despite their efforts, failed to
increase their marginal demands for collateral to a
point where the market could maintain a technically
sound position.

As early as August 12th, Senator Nye, of North
Dakota, had claimed that a “tremendous proportion
of the country’s money and credit is being sucked
up from the interior, and, as one high authority
expressed it, ‘phoned’ into Wall Street.”
        <pb n="77" />
        52 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
In this remark Senator Nye was merely reflecting
 the impression of many in assuming that there
was only so much credit to go around and that Wall
Street was making money scarce and dear for business.
 Those who held this view ignored the fact
that bank reserves were high and that the “tight
money” policy of the Federal Reserve System might
at any time have been revised.

“Boom” Enthusiasm
Senator Robinson of Arkansas declared, and with
some real basis in fact, in a formal statement on
October 30, 1929, that if the foundation of the
belief of ruined investors was faith in the strong
position of American industry, it was also true that
“no less personalities than a former President of
the United States, the Secretary of the Treasury,
and the former Secretary of Commerce, now President,
 contributed by unduly and repeated optimistic
statements to the creation of enthusiastic if not
frenzied ventures in stocks.”
No doubt the “Coolidge boom" and the “Hoover
boom” engendered such public enthusiasm, accompanied
 as they were by repeated statements of the
country’s prosperity and expected increases in prosperity.
 These statements led thousands of investors
into undue borrowings in order to realize the benefits
 of this prosperity for themselves. But I cannot
entirely agree with Professor Jacob H. Hollander,
of Johns Hopkins University, in his view, expressed
before the Academy of Political Science in New
        <pb n="78" />
        Causes of the Panic 53
York on November 22, 1929, that the public by bidding
 up the price of securities, “ignored yield and
earnings in the belief that the country’s growth
would increase the equity and boost the price” of
shares of sound enterprises. No doubt their enthusiasm
 led them, as Professor Hollander asserts, to
make no allowance for business recession, for speculative
 manipulation, or foreign disturbance.
My own impression has been and still is that the
market went up principally because of sound, justified
 expectations of earnings, and only partly because
of unreasoning and unintelligent mania for buying.
The reasons for this view will be elaborated later.

Chief Cause in Unsound Credit Situation
The very soundness of these prospects led to an
unsound credit situation, that is, to general overextension
 of margin accounts. Bear raiders cleverly
took advantage of this situation, selling “short” in
large blocks, many of these stocks which had been
unloaded upon the market and thrown into weak
hands, thus precipitating distress selling and panic.
An authority on the New York Stock Exchange,
whose name is withheld, is disposed to assign to the
raiders a causal 16le, but not one of supreme importance.
 He says:
“I do not agree with some commentators as to
the comparative importance of bear raiding in the
break this fall. Undoubtedly, bear raiding was a
factor in the decline. Yet the results of the Stock
Exchange investigation into this question have shown
        <pb n="79" />
        54 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
that actually the short interest in the market was
very small at a time when inevitably it would have
been extensive had considerable short selling occurred
earlier. This, in fact, was one great reason for the
‘air pockets’ in the market. One must always
remember that a short seller, when he sells, is forced
to become a compulsory buyer of stocks. In panics,
frequently the short interest provides the only effective
 demand for shares, since margin purchasers are
frightened or financially crippled, while investors
wait for the bottom of the decline before invest
ing. In 1914, when war broke out, the New York
stock market was fortunate in possessing a very
large short interest, and this fact accounts for the
remarkable resistance shown by the stock market
prices before the Exchange was compelled to close.
In 1929, the situation was very different. For years
bear traders had been very severely punished, and
there had been little short selling in the market and
practically no short interest. If we had had more
short selling during the summer, it would have of
course restrained the undue rise in share prices at
that time, and would have provided bids in the
market during October and November. The reason
for the organization of the so-called ‘bankers’ pool’
arose from just this fact of an inadequate short
interest in the market. Of course the Stock
Exchange questionnaire was not aimed to halt short
selling, although this perhaps was its psychological
effect.”
But as the panic proceeded, in part, at least,
        <pb n="80" />
        Causes of the Panic

55

through the bear raiding, it produced a vicious circle
in which people were selling who wanted to buy.
The “short selling” continued to hit the investor
when he was down, until prices came to represent,
not a lessened estimate of earnings at all, but an
increased fear of individual insolvency.
As this point was reached, the banks and brokers
were protected by the action of the stock market
on November 13th, in heading off possible bear raids
by requiring all Stock Exchange members to report
daily their “short” sales. Then the short selling
stopped abruptly, prices rose and liquidation proceeded
 in an orderly manner.
This caused those buyers who had been awaiting
their chance to recognize that the market had at
last “touched bottom.” They jumped in and
bought, thus causing prices once more to register,
to some extent, the public’s estimate of future prosbects
 of business. But this body of investors that
took over the distress sales at the bottom constitutes
 a new public, not the old enthusiasts. These
had in large measure been closed out. This new
investing public lacks not only the old enthusiasm
but also the old knowledge, although they are better
controlled. They will be much more cautious than
the holders who bid up the stock price level and
will buy less on borrowed money.
The resultant contraction of demand in the stock
market may prevent prices for a long time from
regaining their old height on the new plateau.
        <pb n="81" />
        CHAPTER IV

THE THREAT TO BUSINESS

THE first effect of the stock market crash was
to make nearly everybody think that twenty-six billions
 lost in paper values of stocks listed on the New
York Stock Exchange must impoverish the nation.
If all that “money” had been lost, approximating
the cost of the World War to the United States,
what would be its effect on business? True, hundreds
 of millions of dollars had been put into Christmas
 Savings funds, and out of these sums much
might be accomplished to keep business going until
the end of the year. But would not the stock market
 panic be followed by an industrial panic or crisis,
with all these billions of dollars lost in the market?
A chill of fear swept the nation. Workmen discussed
the panic anxiously with their families. Employers
thought of loss of orders, shutdowns and hard
times. To some the President's signalizing of the
emergency by calling a national conference of business
 men accentuated the gravity of conditions. Thus
Mr. H. Parker Willis, editor of the New York Journal
 of Commerce, said of Mr. Hoover's conferences:
“Their psychology is certainly bad, because they
give the impression that there is something very
        <pb n="82" />
        The Threat to Business C57

wrong with business, and that if it were not so, these
meetings would be useless and would not be called.
But it is certainly highly important to keep business
moving steadily, in order to prevent the demand for
goods from slowing down too much, and also to
enable the customer to keep up his payments on installment
 purchases. If the Washington conferences
really have the effect of maintaining a little more
steadiness and activity in business they will probably
be worth while.”
As President Hoover himself has said, action
counts, not words. Of necessity the Washington
conferences dealt chiefly in words, because the action
following their deliberation required a great deal of
time before the moneys pledged for industrial programs
 could be applied. For the most part the country
 must take the situation as it is, with an undoubted
record in business recession, already achieved. but
also with many elements of reassurance.

Evidence of Dislocation
There are already evidences of some recession,
the roots of which were in the declines of automobile
 production and building before the crash. These
declines have doubtless been accentuated by the
crash, but they represent a natural slowing down in
these industries due to the fact that the public is
nearer the “saturation point.” After the war there
was a great dearth of building, and the attempt to
fill the void led to a building boom which had largely
spent itself during 1929. It is quite possible, indeed
        <pb n="83" />
        $8 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
even probable, that builders and automobile producers,
 in their eagerness to take advantage of expanding
 income, overestimated the public capacity
to absorb their products. That would naturally lead
to a dislocation in application of labor and capital,
and in these lines a throwing of men out of work
until they could be absorbed in other lines. But
such absorption takes time. Many months must
elapse before the building program projected by the
states and the national government can aid in this
process.
The effect of the market crash will take time to
become fully manifest. Sales have a period of incubation
 lasting for several weeks or even months, so
that a full assessment of the damage wrought by the
panic in curtailing sales cannot be made at once. There
had already been a fall of commodity prices during
the summer of 1929. After seventeen weeks of uninterrupted
 decline, the general wholesale price level
registered a fractional advance; my all-commodity
index fell from 99.1, the high point of the year in
the week of July 26, to 92.2 for the week ended
November 22, a drop of nearly seven points. This
was a swifter decline than any since the index attained
 its base of 1926 as equal to 100. Although the
index fell by 7.5 points between November, 1926,
and July, 1927, during a rather marked business
recession, it then took twice as long as the decline in
the index during 1929. Fortunately in neither case
was the fall in prices very great, and the latest evidence
 points to a rise in the index. While prediction
        <pb n="84" />
        The Threat to Business 59
is always hazardous in economic statistics, and I wish
to avoid making any definite prediction, it would not
be surprising if at about the time this book is published
 the worst of the depression will have been felt
and improvement may be looked for.
Probably the slowest in recovery will be the stock
market, for the reason that the large buyers who
were responsible for high stock prices have had their
wings clipped and their buying power destroyed or
impaired. Their places cannot soon be taken, as it
requires a long time for others to acquire their intimate
 knowledge of the prospects of individual
concerns. Moreover, the faith in those prospects
has been shattered by the crash itself, and the general
 trend toward stocks and away from bonds has
been retarded.
The business situation is reflected in the analysis
of the National City Bank Circular for January,
1930, which compares the panic month of November,
1929, with business conditions during November of
1928. It contains a list of notable recessions, especially
 in the list of metals, with steel production down
by 17.7 per cerit—probably on account of the decline
in building and in automobile production, which had
declined by 20 per cent, with New York City sales of
motor cars down by 30 per cent. Building permits
were down by 28 per cent, and building contracts by
I7 per cent. Carloadings, an important index, had
diminished by 5.4 per cent in this comparison. Consumption
 of electric power had diminished by 7.8
Per cent, sugar consumption by 25 per cent, rubber
        <pb n="85" />
        60 The Stock Market Crash—And After
consumption by 26 per cent, while exports were
down by 17.8 per cent and imports up by 3.8 per
cent.
The decline in export figures seems to confirm the
cabled reports of the position of world commodity
markets which indicate a decline ascribed to the
forced sales succeeding the American stock market
crash and the fall of prices in foreign stock markets.
Commodities were reported to have been “dumped”
in many centers in order to meet losses incurred
through the depression of security values.
But this effect, as will be shown below, was chiefly
psychological and had no basis in fact. The real
effect of the stock market on business is in facilitating
 or impeding the financing of business enterprises,
and in making available stock market profits for
consumption. The psychological effect is naturally
of a temporary character. In the present case, although
 it has done so at great expense to stockholders,
 the stock market has so adequately financed
our leading corporations that it should be no great
deterrent to business, if it is more difficult to obtain
funds for business through the stock market during
1930. Regarding the third point, there is truth in
the contention that stock market profits tend as a
rule to stay in the market during periods of rising
prices so that the makers of these profits, instead of
cashing in, very often prefer to increase their paper
wealth. On this account the decline in the stock
market may not prove to have greatly curtailed consumption
 of commodities.
        <pb n="86" />
        The Threat to Business 61

But the threat to business most feared, namely, the
twenty-six billion deflation in listed paper values,
so full of sound and fury, signifies little. It is now
more universally recognized that in the fall of paper
values there had been merely a transfer of wealth,
not a destruction of any physical wealth, even if there
were a lowered valuation.
This is because the crisis, unlike the 1920 crisis
was not a violent fall of an inflated commodity price
level. Business stoppage and unemployment could
hardly follow a stock panic, because such a case wipes
out profits and substitutes losses, and no concern can
afford long to run at a loss. But such a loss could
hardly follow a stock panic.
It is true that there was danger from the panic to
business in the huge transfer of security holdings
from one set of owners to another set from the
poorer to the richer, which might in some measure
deplete the purchasing power of consumers of the
middle class. But the slump in stock prices destroyed
no physical assets.
As stock prices gradually rose from the panic bottom
 it was found that, to a large extent, the crash
in prices had robbed thousands of Peters to pay a
very few Pauls. There were the same factories in
all the centers of industry producing the same line
of goods, with a difference, so far as could be observed,
 that there was now a new set of shareholders.
By the transfer there would be some dislocation in
demand for goods. The sanguine buyer of stocks
at the old high prices would no longer own the
        <pb n="87" />
        62 The Stock Market Crash—And After

nation’s industries; more conservative buyers would
own them through their stock holdings.
This new set of stock owners will doubtless be
more cautious in buying goods. They will save
more money for investment. On this account, but
chiefly on account of the dislocation, consumer demand
 will be affected. But if the industrial leaders
maintain their confidence in the soundness of business
conditions and the prospects of future prosperity,
there can be little or no recession in industry.
That the purchasing power of the bulk of the nation
 cannot be greatly impaired may be inferred
from the studies, just published, by the National
Bureau of Economic Research, which show that 99
per cent of income receivers in the United States
have incomes below $9,000 and that 50 per cent of
these incomes are below $1,100. It seems inconceivable
 that any substantial number of those whose
incomes are below $1,100 should have suffered loss
in the recent stock market crash. It is improbable
that a large percentage of the 9g per cent of income
receivers having incomes less than $9,000 were in
the stock market and suffered serious loss of income.
These incomes consist mostly of wages and salaries,
and the recipients could have little or no concern
with a stock market panic.
If this be true, the redistribution of corporate
ownership due to the crash is mostly confined to the
upper one or two per cent of the population. The
result may be a somewhat greater concentration of
stock ownership and wealth in the hands of a small
        <pb n="88" />
        The Threat to Business 63

group of the wealthiest class. The probable effect
upon consumption and production would seem not
to be great.
But to the present holders of equity securities the
income from their shares will go on as before. The
shift in valuations compelled the former holders to
sell when they would have liked to buy, because the
real values were indicated by the continued income
from stocks. Panic prices of stocks did not record
the real valuation of them either by sellers or by
buyers. They merely recorded distress selling.
It should be remembered, also, that the majority
of stock holdings were not concerned in the panic
tradings, but remained where they were before the
panic, namely, in strong-boxes. The owners of these
holdings would not care whether the market had
gone up or down, because they were not trading in
securities ; they were relying upon the income of their
stocks and were concerned only in the continuing cash
dividends.

Chief Danger That of Fear
The chief danger, therefore, did not inhere in conditions
 at all. It was the danger of fear, panicky
fear, which might be communicated from the stock
market to business. “My only fear is the fear of
fear” are the words of a courageous man. The
measures taken under the leadership of President
Hoover, therefore, were well calculated to allay
fear. There was danger that business, out of the
contagion of the stock panic, would refuse to make
        <pb n="89" />
        64 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
commitments. Because of such fear it might have
suspended its plans for building factories. It might
have retrenched in expenditures, it might have discharged
 employees, shut up works, and fallen into a
state of paralysis which would spread as the unemployed
 in industry ceased to have purchasing power
to sustain business. In that case, fear would have
produced the same effect as if there were some reason
in conditions themselves for a business depression.
In particular, some business executives who sustained
 heavy personal losses in the stock market were,
indeed, reduced to a state of panic, or overcaution in
their commitments, so that they were not so ready
to carry forward programs mapped out before the
crash. Many executives in the important industrial
concerns had believed in their own companies and
had invested heavily in them. Undoubtedly this is
true of the stocks of hundreds of companies. Under
the impact of their losses these executives were actually
 frightened into beginning to curtail operations,
not so much because it accorded with their deliberate
and reasoned judgment, but because of the abnormal
state. of mind into which they had been thrown
because of their personal losses.
To the extent that these executives did shut down
their shops or withhold business expenditures, their
acts, engendered by fear, would cause unemployment
and maldistribution of consumer purchasing power.
In such a situation the emergency measures taken
by the President and the United States Chamber of
Commerce were calculated to allay the first effects
        <pb n="90" />
        The Threat to Business 65
of panic, as communicated to business. The state of
business itself, its condition and prospects during the
years of the long bull market precedent to the panic,
need careful and convincing attestment to banish
doubts as to its fundamental soundness. This will
be the task of the succeeding chapters on plowedback
 earnings and the ratio which the ascending level
of stock prices, culminating in a new plateau, has
sustained to profits. If it can be shown that business
was in an extraordinarily healthy condition, taken as
a whole, during these years and up to the present, it
will be seen that the new plateau of stock prices
which remains after the panic higher than all previous
 plateaus, was justified, even though the peak of
September, 1929, rose too high.
        <pb n="91" />
        CHAPTER V

PLOWED-BACK EARNINGS

THE increase both in dividend payments and in
plowed-back earnings during 1929 over 1928, was
not only a primal cause of the new plateau of stock
prices, but gave promise of continuing prosperity to
business for 1930. This increase should minimize
the effects of the panic, which was largely restricted
to the stock market.
When earnings are turned back into a business
it is in order to increase the rate of profits according
to the same method by which interest is compounded
on savings. There has always been a plowing-back
of earnings, but it has been especially done in the last
few years.
In measuring the average annual rate of change
in the economic movements in the United States from
1922 to 1927, inclusive, President Hoover's Committee
 on Recent Economic Changes shows that the
rate of profits, or earnings, for industrial corporations
 has increased by 9 per cent yearly, and the
rate of dividend payments for industrial and miscellancous
 corporations has increased yearly by 6.8 per
zent.
These figures imply that the increase in the average
        <pb n="92" />
        Plowed-Back Earnings 67

annual rate plowed-back for the six years—ig2a-1927,
 inclusive, was over 9 per cent per annum; in
fact, if the dividends to start with were half the earnings,
 the earnings plowed-back amounted to 11.2
per cent.
Edgar L. Smith, in his book Common Stocks as
Long Term Investments, made a study of the stock
market, in which he found a material increase in
prices of common stocks of between 2 to 3 per cent
per annum on the average, and sometimes a far
greater increase. He inferred that this must be
mainly due to plowing-back.

Why Stocks Rise Faster Than Earnings
The report on Recent Economic Changes includes
the record of an advance in the prices of industrial
stocks, 1922-1927, at a rate of 14.1 per cent a year,
which for that period exceeds the rate of gain in
dividend payments and of increase in profits. Yet
an important element in the increase in the level of
common stock prices was undoubtedly this increased
rate at which profits were achieved and plowed-back
into industrial undertakings. The percentage increase
 in prices of stocks should be equal to the percentage
 increase in earnings per share if the ratio
of price to earnings were to remain constant. For
common stock this would be faster than the total
profits of the company, which were 9 per cent. As
the rate of return on preferred stocks, being fixed
by contract, cannot increase during prosperity, their
share of it is absorbed by the equity shares, which
        <pb n="93" />
        68 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
would, therefore, rise in price faster than the increase
 in rate of company earnings.
Since 1927, those gains have been continued. During
 the whole period since 1922, the wholesale scrapping
 of old equipment and installation of new machifery
 and inventions have been accomplished with the
increase of prosperity because corporations have become
 more and more hungry for money to exploit
the future. All these new inventions required added
capital, and the stockholder has had to forego a
large part of his dividends in consequence, while the
rate of plowing-back has increased since 1927.
The November, 1929, bulletin of the National
City Bank of New York includes a summary of net
profits in published corporation reports covering the
third quarter and first nine months of 1929, with
comparative figures for the corresponding periods of
1928. The net profits are calculated after all
charges but before any dividends, with few exceptions,
 and are limited to the broad industrial groups
with a view to furnishing a representative picture of
American business in its various divisions. The compilation
 excludes financial organizations such as
banks, insurance companies. investment trusts and
SO On.

Swift Rise in Net Profits
The combined net profits of approximately 600
companies in this compilation amounted, for the third
quarter of 1929, to $1,142,302,000 as compared
with $1,001,244,000 in the third quarter of 1928.
        <pb n="94" />
        Plowed-Back Earnings
That was a gain of 14 per cent. For the first nine
months the same 600 companies had net profits of
$3,223,620,000 as compared with $2,679,934,000
for the corresponding nine months of 1928; a gain
of $543,000,000, or 20 per cent! The circular of
the National City Bank adds the following comment :
“This showing is excellent in itself, but must be regarded
 as particularly impressive considering the
fact that the comparison is with 1928, a year that
surpassed all previous records in earnings.” This
record is eloquent in justification of a heightened
level of common stock prices during 1929.
Excluding railroads and utilities, the manufacturing
 and trading companies revealed in the third
quarter of 1929 a gain of 15 per cent over the same
Quarter of 1928, and of 26 per cent for the full nine
months over the corresponding months of 1928.

1929 Profits Rise Faster Than Stocks
That is an increase in profits at a greater rate than
the increase in stock prices, even during its record
climb of 1928 and 1929, with the exception of two or
three months antedating the panic.
Similar comparisons of increased gains for industrial
 utilities and railroads are found in the estimates
of total and plowed-back earnings calculated from
the averages of the Standard Statistics Company,
Inc, and from the compilations of Ernst &amp;amp; Ernst,
accountants.
The Corporation Earnings Bulletin of Ernst &amp;amp;
Ernst for the first nine months of 1929 showed that
        <pb n="95" />
        22°
soo
75

20

RAILROADS
1926 = 100

3TOC” PRICES

~

n=3



Te

1828

1920

CHART 6.—Net railway earnings show an upward trend from the
first quarter of 1928 to the fourth quarter of 1929, more marked
than the upward trend of stock prices.

22%
200

Tr

[ALL INDUSTRIES]
19262100

STOCK PRICES
225) A

4

LY

D-SQOFT



30

IO28

1027

1928

1928

ural

CHART 7.—Upward trend of industrial net profits since 1927 has
been more pronounced than the rise of industrial common stock
prices.
        <pb n="96" />
        Plowed-Back Earnings 71

the net earnings of 271 industrials were 27.04 per
cent higher than for the corresponding nine months
of 1928; of utilities, 17.48 per cent higher, and of
railroads, 17 per cent higher.
These earnings increased at a faster rate during
1929 than the level of stock prices. This is a prime

22C
200
75

PUBLIC UTILITIES
TELEPHONE COMPANIES
1926 =100

A

0)

5TOCK PRICFS-30



Yi,

1926

Yel

2H

1920

Cuarr 8.—Upward trend of Public Utility common shares during
latter half of 1929 reflects discounting of anticipated future profits
from mergers,

. . 2
reason for the increased price level of stocks in 1929
over 1928, and helps justify the conclusion tha
’ .
stocks were not so much too high as comm y
thought.

A comparison of the third quarter of 1929, which
included the first month of the stock market break
leading to panic, showed for 224 industrials net earnings
 15.77 per cent higher than for the third quarter
        <pb n="97" />
        72 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

of 1928, but 5.72 per cent lower than for the second
quarter of 1929. This estimate approximates that
of the National City Bank. Net earnings had increased
 faster than the level of stock prices during
the periods compared.

Recession in Fall of 1929
Moreover, the bulletin states that the recessions of
profits during the third quarter were not ‘‘entirely
attributable to a lessening of regular activity,” because
 they included seasonal recession during part
or all of the third quarter under the divisions of automobiles
 and trucks, auto parts and accessories, business
 equipment, restaurant chains, and wearing
apparel. Nevertheless, there was some tendency
downward in business as a whole during this quarter
of 1929, with indications of further recession for the
fourth quarter.
But the bulletin concludes that normally satisfactory
 earnings for the year as a whole seemed assured.
This was because of the tremendous gain which the
nine months’ figures revealed over the corresponding
 period of 1928, “which, in itself, was a high point
of business activity for the post-war years.”
In judging earnings for the third quarter, also, it
must be considered that there was an unprecedented
rate of business operation during the summer months
of 1929, when a seasonal recession would be expected.
 There would then be a slackening of pace
for the latter part of the third quarter; yet the earnings
 figures indicated that the third quarter had in-
        <pb n="98" />
        COMPARISON or CASH DIVIDENDS ano TOTAL EARNINGS
INDUSTRIALS AS PERCENTS OF MARKET PRICES

PERCENT

IO
®

~

LEGEND:

[RT

XPT

vM J_J AS ON
1928

CASH
CASH AND PLOWED BACK

x A a
M A MJ J AS O ND
19209

CHART 9.—~After June, 1929, there was a rapid increase in the rate both of cash dividends
and plowed-back earnings.
        <pb n="99" />
        74 The Stock Market Crash—And After
creased satisfactorily over the corresponding period
of 1928.
That the gains of 1929 were extraordinary as
compared with 1928, is indicated in the figures cited
above. That the gains of 1928 were extraordinary
is also shown by a study of 914 companies published
by Ernst &amp;amp; Ernst in their bulletin of May, 1929,
that records corporation balance sheets at the end of
1928. These had increased by 9.18 per cent in current
 assets at the close of 1928, as compared with
the close of 1927; in net working capital they had
increased by 8.86 per cent and in cash and marketable
securities by 19.09 per cent. The latter item shows
clearly that inventories and accounts receivable had
been carefully controlled, and that inventories were
conservative at the close of 1928 in relation to sales,
as compared with 1927.
Changes in corporation profits during 1923 to
1927, inclusive, according to Recent Economic
Changes, show extraordinary increases through the
entire range, with the exception of railroad equipment,
 clothing, textiles and coal, which recorded decreases
 ranging from .1 per cent to 48 per cent in
the average annual rate of change; also, in motor
accessories, building supplies and paper, with decreases
 ranging from 1 per cent to 4.4 per cent. In
all the rest of the industries great increases were
registered—Ileather and shoes by 28.8 per cent for
1927 as compared with 1923; motors by 22.5 per
cent; amusements by 18.9 per cent; miscellaneous
industries by 1¢ per cent: machine and machine man-
        <pb n="100" />
        Plowed-Back Earnings 75
ufacturing by 14.9 per cent; metals and mining by
13.9 per cent; stores by 12.4 per cent; chemicals and
drugs by 12.3 per cent; rubber by 11.3 per cent;
tobacco.by 9.2 per cent; oils by 6.7 per cent; food
and food products by 4.7 per cent. Class 1 railroads
increased profits by 4.2 per cent in 1927, as compared
 with 1923.
Moreover, dividend and interest payments
increased by 7 per cent in average annual rate of
change from 1922 to 1927, inclusive. The total
dividend payments of street railways, industrial and
miscellaneous corporations and steam railroads increased
 yearly in this period by 6.7 per cent, ranging
 from 4.5 per cent increase for steam railroads
to 12.5 per cent for street railways, with a 6.8 per
cent increase for industrial and miscellaneous.
In the same period 1923 to 1927, inclusive, of
expanding production and rising profits, the report on
Recent Economic Changes says that while the number
 of business failures increased by about 1 per
cent a year, yet the liabilities of business failures declined
 at a rate in excess of ¢ per cent a year.

“No-Net-Income” Corporations
There remains to be considered the large percentage
 of returns of corporations which show “no
net income.” According to the analysis by the
Bureau of Internal Revenue of the U. S. Treasury
Department 54.7 per cent of all corporate tax returns
 are found to be companies with net incomes in
1927. The remaining 45.3 per cent embrace corpo-
        <pb n="101" />
        76 ~~ The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

rations that are either inactive or have no net income.
 The lowest percentage of firms reporting net
income was registered in 1921, when 48.05 per cent
were so conditioned. The highest percentage occurring
 in 1917, was 66.04. ‘“No-net-income” corporations
 averaged lowest in 1917 and highest in
1921, with a percentage of 34.91 in 1927; inactive
corporations for that year were 10.39 per cent of
the total.
In addition to these data, a new light is thrown on
the question of proportion of no-profit corporations,
as well as upon that of the real profits of all corporations
 by the researches of Carl Snyder, of the
Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Mr. Snyder
calculates that the average annual net profits of all
corporations, year in and year out, amount to about
IO per cent on gross income, and that they are not
to be reckoned by returns that show “no net profits”
for tax purposes.
Mr. Snyder finds that of 455,000 corporations
some two to three thousand do from 70 per cent to
90 per cent of the nation’s business. Fully three
quarters of these reporting do a small business of
$200 a week or less. These might, as indeed, a
large part of them do, absorb their real net profits
in salaries of officials.
Such is the case with about half of the reporting
corporations, as estimated by Mr. Snyder. In addition,
 many forms of corporations, such as incorporated
 estates, make officials of their beneficiaries who
absorb profits as salaries.
        <pb n="102" />
        Plowed-Back Earnings
No rules have thus far been devised to prevent
this concealment of net returns in salaries. Governments
 cannot fix salaries. In one prosperous concern
 it was found that the President, holding control,
regularly voted himself two-thirds of the net earnings
as salary. Stockholders protested, but did not carry
their protest to the courts, and finally acquiesced.
The inference from income reports, therefore,
that an average of 40 per cent of concerns make no
profit ignores this factor of officers’ salaries, and is
hardly borne out by the average of failures of only
one per cent a year to the total of business concerns.
At any rate, in a large proportion of 40 per cent
reporting no profits for tax purposes, there seems
little danger of bankruptcy.
Mr. Snyder concludes that a truer picture might
be drawn of net incomes for all corporations by
figures that include interest, cash dividends, and
officers’ salaries.
Moreover, he deducts the reported deficits by adding
 the reserved part of the real earnings, thus
arriving at a figure double the reported net earnings.
The compensation of officers for 1924, the year
last reported, was $2,600,000,000. Itis to be hoped
that the custom of reporting this item separately will
be resumed in future revenue reports.

77

Net Corporate Incomes, as Revised
Mr. Snyder's method of picturing net income finds
the $9,673,402,089 net income reported for tax pur-Poses
 for 1926 expanded to a true or revised net
        <pb n="103" />
        78 The Stock Market Crash—And After
income of $14,033,000,000. Even for the depression
 year 1921, despite the heavy losses of inventories
 in that year, the revised net income figure
is $5,858,000,000.
To these estimates Mr. Snyder adds a reckoning
of revised net income reported by individuals doing
business and by partnerships. In this he assumes
that the percentage of net to gross income is the same
as for corporate net to gross. He has also estimated
the total gross income of all business which rose
from $145,000,000,000 in 1919 to $222,000,000,-000
 in 1926.
Despite the growing share in total business done
by the larger corporations, the revised net income of
individuals has also expanded, in Mr. Snyder's calculations,
 from $3,878,000,000 in 1919 to $6,281,-000,000
 In 1929. It appears, therefore, that individuals
 in business are suffering no extreme hardship
in competition with larger corporate units.
So long as the larger aggregations of capital can
buy the assets of many concerns and fix their prices,
they have undoubted advantage over individuals who
may not even combine in price agreements that prevent
 cutthroat competition. The larger corporate
form has advantages, also, in economies of largescale
 production that account for a steady advance
in proportion of business done. But it would appear
that for the business of the country as a whole, net
income is by no means low and there is no dearth of
distributed products. These are increasing. But the
ratio of reserved profits, of profits saved for a “rainy
        <pb n="104" />
        Plowed-Back Earnings
day” or plowed-back into business for larger future
corporate returns, has likewise risen.
Prosperity Rooted in War Earnings
The roots of the prosperity that attended the long
bull market were partly in the thrifty corporate
handling of profits during the War. As prices rose
rapidly in the execution of war contracts, larger and
larger proportions of profits were plowed-back into
renewals and extensions. of plant.
In individual hands these profits might easily have
been squandered. But with corporate management
—especially with the practice of war-time economy
and the wish of the larger stockholders to avoid
surtaxes—dividends were quite generally kept at
Per cent on par value while earnings kept up to 10
per cent, in some cases, and, even to 25 per cent a
year.

79

Such abnormal profits were due primarily to the
rising price level, or lessened purchasing power of the
dollar, which helped the stockholder at the expense
of the bondholder. The withholding of profits, thus
effected, increased enormously the reserve productive
 power of the nation. It fertilized, so to speak,
the topsoil of business production and stirred its
subsoil. The result was a deeper-rooted growth of
business, of which the increased cash returns were
the thrifty fruitage from stocks representing adequately
 the entire market.
During this period of war and post-war prosperity
the mounting billions of deposits placed in savings
        <pb n="105" />
        80 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

banks and with insurance companies, indicated that
the harvest of dividends was not being spent too fast
in individual consumption. Indeed, there were
plausible arguments during recent years that the
time had come to spend more in order to utilize the
augmented flow of a higher powered industry, since
an increased standard of living was what had been
sought by all this saving and reinvestment.
As wages increased with growing unit production
of workers, the wage earners of many corporations
shared as investors in their securities, and the augmented
 investor class received an augmented income
from its holdings. All this told in favor of increased
demand from the mass of consumers, better proportioned
 to the increase of the well-directed productive
energies of the nation. From this added demand
further profits were reaped. During the long bull
market there was the record of increased real income,
 while plowed-back earnings gave promise of
future values resident in the productive and consuming
 plant of the nation that were properly reflected
in a heightened level of stock prices.
        <pb n="106" />
        CHAPTER VI

CHANGED RATIO OF PRICES TO EARNINGS

ARE the conclusions of the preceding chapter,
with respect to the increased rate of plowed-back
earnings, stated with too great optimism?
One friend, who is an authority on prices and earnings,
 fears that I have put myself “in the position
 of one who is trying to talk the stock market up
from the current level—trying to prove that prices
should go higher.” Another friend also feels
that my presentation looks like “making out a case”
for the one point of view; that it does not give due
weight to counterbalancing considerations. Still
another puts in a cautioning word that there is
“some evidence that recent stock splits and so on,
had been tending to reduce the proportion of earnings
 ‘plowed-in.'” All these friends are qualified
experts. Their divergent and sometimes conflicting
opinions have been carefully weighed.
Whether I am oversanguine with respect to the
retention of the present plateau of stock prices—and
by this I do not necessarily mean a return to the peak
of September, 1929—it is a fact that my original
estimates of the proper height of this plateau have
undergone some modification. A well-known expert

d.
        <pb n="107" />
        PRICE EARNINGS RATIO

dont

1929

dabei}
i928

ING

Ea Ol

1928
Jo2

CREASE —

1929

ALL INDUSTRIALS
STANDARD STATISTICS

Ce he
JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUNE JUL. AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC

CuART 10~—For all Industrial common shares earnings increased
far more rapidly than the increase of stock prices during 1929. But
this group is open to the objection that it is a variable group of
stocks.

3
        <pb n="108" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 83
who has read a draft of this book believes that twothirds
 of the rise of stocks since 1926 was justified by
earnings; that is, a rectified price level should be at
167, on the basis of 100 for 1926. My own picture
of the proper level of the plateau is only slightly
higher, say 175, on the basis of 1926.
It is, of course, impossible to tell to what extent
stock split-ups, and inability to earn future dividends
at a rate comparable to the increase of savings at compound
 interest, are possible for companies plowingback
 their earnings; or to what extent they are understating
 their earnings. But a rough measure of
their average success in increasing the rate of earnings
 is to be found in a comparison of the rate of
increase in stock prices during 1929 with the rate of
increase in total earnings for that year, as compared
with 1928.

Inflation Preceding the Crash
With respect to the quarter immediately preceding
the stock market break, it has been stated that
stock prices were rising much more rapidly than
earnings. Thus Mr. Laurence H. Sloan testifies concerning
 the calculations of the Standard Statistics
Company:
“Our index of the market value of 405 leading
industrial, utility, and rail issues rose, during the
three months immediately preceding mid-September,
at the rate of 76 per cent per year. At the same
time it was clear that earnings of leading industrial
concerns could not, by any stretch of the imagina-
        <pb n="109" />
        84 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
tion, increase more than 2§ per cent this year as
compared with 1928. Stock prices, therefore, were
rising three times more rapidly than earnings. The
future was being mortgaged further and further
ahead. There was no statistical precedent by which
to judge to what degree prices were entitled to outrun
 earnings, but when stock quotations get to stepping
 thrice as high and handsomely as the intrinsic
values behind them, it should be time for careful
people to stop, look, and listen.”
It was apparently during this three-month period
prior to the break’ that speculation became feverish
and unhealthy and stock prices mounted to a dangerous
 peak. It remains, however, that for the first
nine months of 1929 the Standard Statistics computations
 show that prices of industrial stocks, in their
relation to total earnings, distributed and undistributed,
 averaged lower during 1929, up to the panic
of October and November, than during all of 1928.
{See Chart 10.)
Had there been inflation in the stock price level
from the standpoint of earnings due to fundamentally
unsound conditions of business and earnings during
1929, it would presumably be reflected in a higher
and not a lower ratio of stock prices to earnings.
Instead, earnings of stocks on the average went up
during 1929 slightly faster than prices on the New
York Stock Exchange.
It is nevertheless true that the averages fail to
give a complete picture. A correspondent notes that
the “actual danger lay in an excessive inflation of the
        <pb n="110" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 83
prices of a few active stocks; this was the weak link
of the chain; some of the supposedly conservative
investment trusts were buying certain stocks at insanity
 levels.” Doubtless this accounts largely for
the rapid increase in price of certain stocks as compared
 with the increase in their rate of total earnings
during the months immediately preceding the break.
But it is important to note that during 1929, as
compared with 1928, the price earnings ratio fell
not only on the average, but for a majority of the
individual stocks listed in the Standard Statistics
Company’s compilation.
The increase in the price earnings ratio for public
 utilities during the first nine months of 1929
was due to the greatly enhanced expectation of earnings
 on account of the mergers in this field and accompanying
 introduction of sweeping economies in
operation. Up to a certain point this increase in
the ratio was justified. Also, in the cases of the
great majority of stocks, while prices were going up,
earnings were rising faster than prices. When during
 1928 people bought on a high price-earnings
ratio, expecting the earnings to go up still further,
they were justified so far as the next year, 1929,
was concerned, and during that year—at least, until
the ninety days preceding the panic—the high market
seems to be justified on the basis of anticipated earnings,
 which were behaving as expected. It seemed
extremely probable that 1930 would show still
higher earnings and go on justifying the situation
of buyers in 1928 on a rising market.
        <pb n="111" />
        PRICE EARNINGS RATIO

lL

. 1929

25h

ahidder
Fhlnbd
—{c28-i



devessne
EE GE

INDUSTRIALS
FIXED GROUP
45 STOCKS

1928
DEC
li

—

3. JAN, FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUNE JUL. AUG. SEPT. OCT. Nov. DEC.

CHART r1.—Standard Statistics Data. A steady trend downward
in the price-earnings ratio during 1928—that is, the number of times
industrial common stock prices were of earnings—indicates that
while the market price level was climbing earnings were climbing
at a greater rate. At the market high during September, the priceearnings
 ratio actually decreased as compared with September, 1928.

14
        <pb n="112" />
        PRICE EARNINGS RATIO

Ed

aessvansee
plliranees
sespenes Bo =
essasactmesnene: To 2

DECREASE

arg. ho

Tome
LAL
INCREASE

LL

RAILROADS
XED GROUP
25 STOCKS

ECREASE

AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC.

CHART 12.—Standard Statistics Data! Fixed group of rail stocks
shows decline in price-earnings ratio during four months preceding
October-November break, denoting more rapid increase in rate of
earnings than of common’ stock prices.
        <pb n="113" />
        88 The Stock Market Crash—And After
This is borne out by the accompanying Charts
Nos. 11 and 12, denoting fixed groups of stocks that
recorded a reduction in the price-earnings ratio
during the months preceding the panic.
The averages do not give a complete picture, and
in that sense we cannot use the price earnings ratio
as a very reliable comparison unless consideration is
given to the behavior of the majority of stocks individually,
 because of the variability of the expected
earnings. There are also difficulties to be faced in
the choice of stocks that publish only annual
earnings figures, and in those stocks where there is
concealment of earnings for tax evasion purposes.
 Also, we must consider the various types
of stocks that might enter into the ratio, seasoned
and unseasoned. Thus some stocks are just reviving
 from the depression with the prospects of a great
increase in earnings, but others are of the type of
standard old-fashioned corporations without any
such expectations. The price-earnings ratios of the
old-fashioned type should be perhaps ten times annual
 earnings, which is the traditional ratio for a
fair selling price for stocks during the period prior
to 1922. But for the new type of rapidly expanding
 corporation the price-earnings ratio might be
anywhere up to 100 to 1, or even literally to infinity
in the initial stages of investment when earnings are
not being realized. All corporations pass through
this initial stage.
During 1929 stocks were being selected with respect
 to their probabilities of future earnings. In
        <pb n="114" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 89
fact, there had been a careful choice among the general
 groups of stocks and within those groups.
In this process the price-earnings ratio might
properly go up in certain cases because the public
thought stocks less risky than formerly on account
of the principle of “safety through diversification”
or for other reasons, or because the rate of interest
or its equivalent for stocks as a “basis” of discounted
future earnings had been reduced, or because the
public expected a more rapid increase of earnings
in the future than they did formerly.
On these accounts the price-earnings ratio for
common industrial stocks appears to have risen in
the last few years only from an alleged, traditional
ten to one, to a 1324 ratio in September, 1929, or
by only 35 per cent. With so many causes at work,
the average effect of any one of these causes evidently
 does not need to be great in order to account
for the whole “mystery.”
The price earnings ratio for industrials fell to
9.8 in November, 1929, from a high point of 16.2
in January of that year. This ratio of 9.8 is the
lowest since May of 1927, the earliest month for
which such statistics are available. Prior to November,
 1929, the lowest ratio was 11.2 for May, 1927;
the highest was 16.2 for January, 1929; so that the
fall in November was to a point 40 per cent below
the highest recorded.

Static Conditions Have Given Way
Thus, except for a few months in 1920 preced-
        <pb n="115" />
        90 The Stock Market Crash—And After
ing the panic, it would seem that the level of stock
prices was constantly at a slower rate of increase
than the rate of earnings of corporations. As compared
 with 1928, this ratio had been reduced by
careful selection of stocks in the market until the
panic brought the entire level of stocks down to a
point comparable with the old ten-to-one ratio that
prevailed prior to the period of increased “tempo”
in business, so thoroughly described in the report on
Recent Economic Changes.
That is too low a ratio of stock prices to earnings.
 The old static conditions of industry and trade
have given way. We are in a dynamic world, where
the old conception of any fixed ratio of earnings to
prices of stocks as a proper ratio must yield to the
demands of shifting scales of industrial effort.
THe price-earnings ratio of bonded securities, of
course, is relatively fixed for the life of each particular
 bond. For bonds the term “yield” is
synonymous with earnings, while for stocks it is not.
Bond yields, the reciprocal of the price-to-cashearnings
 ratio, during 1929 ranged from 3.4 per
cent for Liberty Bonds and 4.3 per cent for municipals,
 to 4.7 and 4.9 per cent for rails and utility
bonds respectively. For industrial bonds it was s.1
per cent. The price earnings ratio for Liberty
Bonds, for example, was 33 to 1. Leonard Ayres
reports that during the twenty-eight years from
1900 through 1927, the market prices of dividend
paying industrial common stocks averaged about
sixteen times as much as their dollar dividends; that
during the same period the prices of a list of high-
        <pb n="116" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 91

grade rail bonds averaged about twenty-two times
as much as their dollar yield. Relationship between
the yields was that of eleven to eight.
But unlike the fixed relation of bond prices to
bond yields, the price-earnings ratio for stock
should reflect not only current earnings but expected
earnings. That is why the price-earnings ratios
should not be fixed to any standard, but wholly with
reference to expected earnings of different stocks.
At the average price-earnings ratio of ten to one,
which prevailed after the panic, however, it should
be noted that while the stock exchange had endured
the severest break in history, this did not suffice to
shake the price level of stocks off a warrantably new
high plateau which had been built up since 1922.
Within a month the market rebounded to a level 21
per cent higher than the low of November 13th—
and that low was 30 per cent higher than the 1926
level of stock prices.
A potent reason for the post-panic rebound of
1929 is found in the record of dividend payments
and of corporation earnings for the first nine months
of 1929. This, as reported by the New York Times,
spelled a gain in real income and sound conditions
of business that was reflected in cash dividends
amounting to $3,122,000,000 during the first three
Quarters of 1929, as against $2,395,000,000 during
the like period of 1928. Cash dividends aggregated
more than $399,000,000 during September, 1929,
as contrasted with $278,000,000 during September,
1928,
Moreover, greatly as cash dividends increased
        <pb n="117" />
        92 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
during 1929, the rate of plowing-back of earnings
increased faster. The proportion of cash dividends
to all earnings was $71 for every $100 in August,
1927, while the market was rising to its record high;
it was $75 in August, 1928; but in August, 1929, this
proportion had fallen to $64 for cash dividends—
although, in that ratio, they exceeded the total of
1928—that is, $64 for every $100 of the expanded
total of earnings, the rate of which rose from 7 per
cent during August, 1928, to 714 per cent during
August, 1929.
It hardly needs emphasizing that enhanced capital
values, reflected by such figures of increased earnings,
 justified in large part the increase of the general
 level of stock prices during 1929. The high
point for the week ended September 6, 1929, on my
index of stock prices was 117 points above its lowest
level after the beginning of 1926, which was the base
year of the index. Rails were 69 points higher.
Utilities rose by 167 points. The agricultural equipment
 groups rose by 427 per cent; the office equipment
 group rose by 407 per cent; electrical equipment
 increased by 357 per cent; motors by 269 per
cent; chemicals by 251 per cent; coppers by 249 per
cent, while various other groups increased by about
100 per cent in price for that week. So the general
decline of 38 per cent in the price level from the
highest week in September to the lowest week in
November is a small fall compared with the rise of
this prosperity plateau subsequent to 1926, a plateau
of which the foundations stretch down to the recovery
from the deflation of 1920-1921.
        <pb n="118" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 93

Selective Character of Market

The decreasing ratio of stock prices to earnings
during 1929 emphasizes what has already been said
about the selective character of the stock market. It
suffices to answer perhaps careless talk uttered prior
to the panic and during its progress, that the market
as a whole had been forced up chiefly by reckless
indiscriminate speculation. President Simmons of
the New York Stock Exchange drew attention, in
his address before the Indiana Bankers’ Association
on September 11, 1929, to what he called the intelligently
 selective nature of current stock price movements.
 Mr. Simmons commented in terms on the
“marked discrimination shown by investors in select.
ing certain issues and disregarding others” as a salu.
tary consequence of the participation by the public
in investment trusts and in experienced financial
investment services.
As the market marched to its peak about half of
the groups listed receded in price, while half went
up. Tobacco and tobacco products stocks went down.
So did the Standard Statistics Company groups of
theaters, motion pictures and amusements; textiles;
sugar producing and refining; silk and silk goods;
chain stores; retail trade; rayon; meat packing;
leather and fertilizers, tires and rubber goods, automobile
 parts and accessories, automobiles and trucks,
and apparel stocks.
The rise, also, was selective. This was manifest
in agricultural implements, airplanes, building equipment,
 chemicals, copper and brass, electrical equip-
        <pb n="119" />
        94 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
ment, food products, household products, machinery,
mining and smelting, miscellaneous manufacturing
services, office and business equipment, oil producing
and refining, paper and paper products, radios,
phonograph and musical instruments, railroad equipment,
 department stores, shipping and shipbuilding,
shoes, steel and iron, United States Steel, utilities
operating companies and holding companies, and
telephone and telegraph companies.
As in the market climb of 1929, sO In its recession
of September and October, the selective principle
was still largely operative. It is shown in the records
 of my indexes of stock prices from the high of
209.7 for industrials during the week ended September
 6th, based on the average of 1926 as 100. For
the week ended November 1 sth, this index fell to
130.1, equivalent to a decline of 38 per cent, while
the extreme speculative stocks declined by so per
cent. During this interval railroad stocks fell by
26 per cent, while public utilities fell by 43 per cent
in price. But during November the best stocks fell,
and often because they were the best known, because
bought on borrowed money.
In the rebound upward during the month following
November 15th, to and including the week ended
December 13th, the first-grade investment industrials
increased by 14 per cent; semi-speculative industrials
increased by 11 per cent, while the third or speculative
 class increased by 1 3 per cent—showing intelligent
 selection at work favoring the high-grade
investment stocks, but not so marked as between the
speculative grades.
        <pb n="120" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 95

In no period during 1929 did stocks generally go
down together or rise together indiscriminately, except
 at the height of the panic; but during the entire
year, and not excepting the worst of the panic period,
the new plateau of the market stood firm on its
foundation of unexampled national prosperity.
As illustrative of this truth, the Boston News Bureau
 has published a table showing 1929 low prices,
established in most cases during November, and
what these prices represent in terms of the former
capitalization, after taking into account split-ups
and extra stock dividends. The high prices in 1923
are also indicated for comparison. No consideration
is given to “rights” or regular stock dividends. In
this table it is shown, for example, that Radio Corporation
 with a 550 per cent appreciation leads the
group in percentage rise, while General Electric takes
the honors from the standpoint of appreciation in
dollars per share. The Bureau states that had consideration
 been given to the distribution of Electric
Bond and Share stock to General Electric shareholders,
 together with subsequent split-ups and
“rights” on that issue, General Electric would
unquestionably be the star performer from both
angles.
The records of such issues as Anaconda, American
 Telephone, Liggett &amp;amp; Myers “B”, Montgomery-Ward,
 Reynolds Tobacco “B”, and the railroad
shares, would show up better if “rights” were taken
into consideration. For instance, the Bureau says,
in the case of Montgomery-Ward the “rights” issued
in November, 1928, fluctuated between $19¢ and
        <pb n="121" />
        96 The Stock Market Crash—And After
$270 before they expired. “Rights” attached to
other issues were not so valuable.
The equivalent price in the case of General Motors,
 for instance, is arrived at by the Bureau in the
following manner. The stock which made a 1923
high of 1714 was exchanged on the basis of one new
share for each four shares, thus reducing the number
of shares to one quarter of the previous number
outstanding. Then a 50 per cent stock dividend was
declared, followed by a two for one split-up and a
still later two and one-half for one split-up. The
comparative list, with fractions omitted from the
last four of the five columns is as follows *

AppreciaTioN oF Pivorar Common SHARES
From Tor PRICES OF 1923 To Low Prices DURING 1929 PANIC
(Compilation by Boston News Bureau)
Equiva
lent

1929
low
77
197
s5d
86
90
62
193%
160
70
1953
30
103
633
rho
80}
70
80
68%
-3%
80
-R

‘n23  Apprec. Apprec.
-h  'n points in %
220
76
175
382
23
170
50
rox
32
26

Air Reduction ..........
Allied Chemical .......
Allis Chalmers .........
American Can .........
American Locomotive ..
American Smelting .....
American Tel. &amp;amp; Tel...
American Tob. “B” ....
Anaconda
Atchison ......ceenvenn.
Atlantic Refining .......
Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio......
California Packing ....
Ches. &amp;amp; Ohio .........
Cons. Gas ,....evuvennn
Corn Products .........
DuPont ...oovovvnnnnns.
General Electric ......
General Motors ........
Gillette Safety Razor ...
Hudson Motors .

+
-

6
ro
186
193
320
70
195
120
10%
127
160
160
280
560
672
63
376
[33

t 2
59
53
105
160
60
7
24
69
160
148
202
17
292
22

45
40
76
91
120
412
470
46
34
19

75
46
90
132
75
278
235
271
29
3Q
        <pb n="122" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earnings 97
APPRECIATION OF Pivorar ComMmoN SHARES—Continued
Apprec. Apprec.
in points in %
165
124
118
71
90
83
251
169
49
175
155
446
13
218
550
61
12
9

Int. Harvester .........
Int. Tel &amp;amp; Tel. ........
Kennecott .............
Liggett &amp;amp; Myers “B” ...
Loew's, Inc. ............
Mont. Ward ...........
Nash Motors .........
Nat. Biscuit ......ou0n..
N. Y. Central ..........
North American ........
Otis Elevator ..........
Packard Motor .........
Paramount Fam. Lasky. .
Pub. Serv. of N. J. .....
Radio Corp. ...........
Reynolds Tob. “B” .....
Southern Pacific ........
Stand. Oil of N. J.......
Studebaker ........
Texas Corp. ...........
Union Carbide .........
Union Pacific ..........
United Fruit ...........
U.S. Steel ......couvn..
Western Union .........
Westinghouse Elec. .....
Woolworth ............

6g
23
498
80
12
19%
40 ‘
140 140
160 160
66% 66
95 390
2 82
i, 105
54 162
26 26
39 i21
1o6 tob
48 = 4b
38% 03 at
so 50 J? _
59 177 67 10 164
*00 200 134 56 39
99 247 187 6o 32
150 210 123 97 80
I55 155 119 36 30
100 110 67 43 64
521 313 200 21 8

3

Here is a record of the appreciation of leading
stocks, reckoned at the panic low of 1929, ranging
from 8 per cent for Woolworth to 446 per cent for
Packard Motors, and 550 per cent for Radio Corporation.
 This comparison establishes beyond peradventure
 the substantial appreciation of market
values above the old plateau of 1915-22, and at a
remarkable average percentage over the highs of
1923, even at the 1929 panic bottom, when the
average price of industrial common stocks had fallen
to less than ten times earnings.
        <pb n="123" />
        98 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
In the face of this record, the faults leading to the
panic cannot be found in the industrial situation, or
in the high activity of business and industry, or in the
rate of earnings, or in an unsatisfactory range of
ratios of stock prices to earnings.
There was undoubtedly overextension of loans.
There was a fever of speculation during the months
immediately preceding the panic, which bid up prices
to a peak that rose faster, for the time, than earnings
seemed to warrant,
But the precipitous fall in the market went too
far, in the light of the sound reasons justifying the
long bull market, namely, justifiable expectation of
great and increasing earnings, the fact that they were
so generously plowed-back, the warranted expectation
 of safety through diversification of investments,
and, finally, a consequent lowered basis of discounting
 the future as apparently reflected in price
earnings ratios.
Was, then, the high price level of stocks during
1929 completely justified? Or were there also elements
 of unsoundness which explain the final intemperate
 rise of the bull market?
As shown in Chapter II, Mr. Carl Snyder of the
Federal Reserve Bank of New York finds that stocks
had been seriously undervalued during the period of
1919 to 1924, as compared with the higher price
level of commodities. The long rise in the commodity
 price level had increased the dollar earnings
of common shares in terms of a 57-cent dollar.
Bonds and preferred securities were precluded from
absorbing their share of this increase, and the invest.
        <pb n="124" />
        Changed Ratio of Prices to Earmmngs 99
ing public during this period had failed to realize
that stocks should go up in price not only at the rate
of increase in the level of commodity prices, but
still higher; because, according to the equity principle,
 common shares became the residuary legatee,
so to speak, of the increased earnings which the
preferred securities could not absorb.
It was only as the public came to realize, largely
through the writings of Edgar Lawrence Smith, that
stocks were to be preferred to bonds during a period
of dollar depreciation, that the bull market began in
good earnest to cause a proper valuation of common
shares. This movement was overdone, at any rate
during the months immediately preceding the panic.
As speculation became uncontrolled, stocks rose too
fast and the investing public entered rapidly the
phase of marginal overextension. This rendered
the market subject to apprehension, bear attacks, and
panics that produced a period of acute liquidation,
bringing the ratio of stock prices to earnings below
the proper expectation of future profits.
Yet the overextension that produced this violent
reaction was not all foolish. It may even be said
that the speculation was, chiefly or largely, due to
eagerness to profit by the great opportunities for
future earnings that were justifiably expected. People
 went into debt to acquire stocks because they had
sound reasons for these ‘‘great expectations.”
Succeeding chapters will show the distinguishing
reasons for the greater expectations of future earnings
 in the increased “tempo” of business and industry.
 This increased rate of activity is manifest in
        <pb n="125" />
        100 The Stock Market Crash—And After
invention and scientific research, industrial management,
 in labor’s cobperative policy, in the economies
accompanying mergers, in the gains of prohibition,
and in seven years of a stable price level and steadied
purchasing power of the dollar. In all these respects
the experts constituting the Committee on Recent
Economic Changes appointed by Herbert Hoover
have reported a speeding-up of production and exchange
 beyond any period of similar length. The
conclusions of this committee have not been seriously
challenged in any quarter. They have given rise,
however, to extravagant claims which their findings
do not warrant, to the effect that a “new era” differing
 radically from the long upward swing of
progress that has characterized the industrial revolution
 is in progress.
For those who sponsor these extravagant claims
it is well to point out that, in the words of the Hoover
Committee, the “distinctive character of the years
from 1922 to 1929 owes less to fundamental change
than to intensified activity.” But the fruits of jn.
tensified activity are real. In a business sense they
fructify in earnings, and in the increased expectation
of earnings, which is discounted in a manner to increase
 the price level of common stocks. The chapters
 devoted to the elements of this intensified
activity should enable the reader to gauge more accuratelv
 the future situation of the stock market than
any contemplation of the damage wrought by the
panic and its immediate causes would permit.
        <pb n="126" />
        CHAPTER VII

THE AGE OF MERGERS

THAT 1922-1927, and after, have witnessed an
increased “tempo” or acceleration in the formation of
mergers will hardly be disputed. One who reads the
daily headlines sees that there is a “Race for Mergers
 in Steel”; “Large Mergers on Way in Utilities”;
 that there are merger moves in transmission
and natural-gas pipe lines with systems of various
kinds in nation-wide links, expected for economical
reasons; that there is a “Plan Announced to Merge
Investment Trusts”; that there is 2 “Vacuum Oil
Merger with Standard Oil Near” with agreement for
formation of a billion-dollar concern; that a department
 store merger has been formed; that there is a
new aircraft merger afoot; that there is a multiple
merger plan for the railroads authorized by Congress
 and published by the Interstate Commerce
Commission; that there are bank mergers formed
and forming from coast to coast, heralding the acceptance
 of branch banking, and that the continued
increase in the number of mergers and consolidations
 in the trade association field is presaged by the
steady growth of combinations in trade and industry.
Mergers have had much to do with the increase in
101
        <pb n="127" />
        102 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
the stock price level during the long bull market.
In the public utilities field, especially, mergers are
responsible for the increase of stock prices to something
 like 26 times earnings up to the market crash
in October, while the crash itself brought down the
price-earnings ratio to 16 to 1 during November—
as against only 1324 to 1 for the average of the
whole market during the first nine months of 1929.

Records of Merger Earnings
Today mergers are generally regarded as inevitable,
 because they make for lower production costs.
It is true that the reverse is sometimes the case, as
the listed securities on the New York Stock Exchange
have shown for many years. In fact, between 1922
and 1923, the Federal Trade Commission’s examination
 of costs and earnings in sixteen industries
showed that the largest mergers were not so profitable
 as the concerns with investment of between
$500,000 and $1,000,000. Of companies engaged
 in crude petroleum production the investment
 group recording over $25,000,000 capital had
slightly smaller profits than companies averaging
from $5,000,000 to $25,000,000; whereas in the
petroleum refining group the companies averaging
$100,000,000 and over showed the same percentage
of return on capital investment as those under
$1,000,000. These data, the Committee on Recent
Economic Changes says, are by no means conclusive
for industry as a whole. It notes as “highly significant”
 that in eight out of nine large production
        <pb n="128" />
        MERGERS RECORDED
1928 ss 221
11]

Sone Hes

,

4

1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928

CHART 13.—A concern “acquired,” means that one of the original companies
persisted; nevertheless often an acquisition has the same significance as a merger.
A merger, of course, means that several concerns have been organized as an entirely
new corporation. Data are obtained from Recent Economic Changes (page 184),
recording mergers and acquisitions in manufacturing and mining.
        <pb n="129" />
        104 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

industries, locomotives being the exception, the
“large concerns have gained more than the middlesized
 establishments.” The report of the Committee
 ‘‘assumes that the advance in security prices of
a group of concerns within an industry, relative to
the other concerns in the industry, indicate that that
group is making more of a success of its business than
the other concerns.” If this assumption is correct,
then the advance in utility stock prices, for example,
is solidly based. Mr. Hoover's Committee discloses
a situation which, it says, may have any one of
several explanations. It adds:
“It may indicate that the large concerns are finding
 the economies which the Federal Trade Commission
 figures for several years ago did not disclose at
that time. It may indicate that the large concerns,
because of modern methods and conditions of selling
and distribution, are taking a larger and larger share
of the nation’s business, as was indicated by the record
 of individual establishments given above. This
may be even at a higher cost than their competitors.
Or finally, it may indicate that the same dogma, which
expresses itself so often in mergers and consolidations—the
 belief in the universal advantages of size
and large-scale production—is thus expressing itself
in the valuation of corporation securities” (pages
199, 200).
The Committee's further study indicates that the
“large concern will maintain steadier operation than
an equivalent number of small concerns.” The explanation
 follows:
        <pb n="130" />
        The Age of Mergers 103

“The various small concerns will compensate for
each other’s fluctuations to some extent, but the
large concern will have the advantage in being better
able to plan ahead, to study its market, and to take
advantage of regional differences in business conditions.
 Furthermore, while various fluctuations of
the small concerns may compensate for each other
statistically, they do not do so economically. In each
case the concern is required to maintain machinery
and equipment sufficient to meet its maximum demand.
 The result is a total capacity greater than
the single large company will find necessary. Finally,
the wider fluctuations in the individual small companies
 will result in continual hiring and discharging
of labor. Other small companies may stand ready to
hire the man who has just been discharged, but unless
 a number of small companies are located in the
same community, operation by small companies will
tend to keep a larger number of men unemployed
than when large companies dominate the industry.”

Mergers Grow Despite Prejudices
These considerations indicate why big business is
coming into its own, and men talk in sanguine terms
about the “Fordizing” of business. Only a short
time ago there was great prejudice against big business
 of every kind, particularly when it was obtained
by combination. But suddenly the pent-up pressure
toward larger business units, in spite of public
prejudice and the opposition of politicians, has broken
free in a wonderful period of expansion.
        <pb n="131" />
        106 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
But it should be borne in mind that the economies
from mergers take time to develop, while the effect
on the stock market of their formation is instant.
Sometimes, when from twelve to eighteen months
elapse before economies are reflected in added dividends,
 the ratio of prices of merger stocks to earnings
 may seem to rise unduly. Yet an eventual continuous
 bettering of earnings may justify the higher
prices.
This, with its resultant economies of large-scale
production, accounts in large measure for the great
appreciation of security values during the last few
years. During the Roosevelt and Wilson régimes
there was an organized effort at “trust busting”;
it was the popular sport of politicians, but in these
days under Coolidge and Hoover, governmental
authorities have gone the limit to stretch the Sherman
Act and the Clayton Act in order to aid the move.
ment for business efficiency, because so many now
believe the interests of the people of the United
States require big business. True, there are still
prosecutions under the anti-trust laws, but they are
fewer and not trumpeted for political effect. While
we avoid the word “trust” today, we do have the
same result through “mergers”; these have not
fallen heir to the unpopularity of the trusts, but are
recognized as a means of economy.
In fact, amendments have been from time to time
offered considerably modifying the Sherman Anti
Trust Act, the Clayton Act and other anti-trust
laws. In the last administration President Coolidge
        <pb n="132" />
        The Age of Mergers 107
and members of his cabinet urged this revision. The
national Democratic platform included a plank
which, while demanding strict enforcement of the
anti-trust laws, called for “enactment of other laws”
if necessary, to preserve the right of the small merchant
 and manufacturer by proper associational
agreements to ‘earn a legitimate profit from his
business.” President Hoover and the Republican
party have approved combinations big and little. It
is true that here and there a voice is raised against
the rapid formation of mergers, such as that of
Henry Ward Beer, President of the Federal Bar
Association and formerly Assistant United States
Attorney General. Mr. Beer predicted that the
country would see a ‘new trust-busting crusade”
when President-Elect Hoover should assume office.
But there has been no crusade, and for obvious
reasons.

More, Betier, and Cheaper Goods
Most mergers produce profits by producing more,
better and cheaper commodities and services. That
is why the Hahn system has formed a chain of department
 stores across the country to effect total
sales of a billion a year. It is the reason for the
pioneer Atlantic and Pacific chain of grocery stores,
and for the Woolworth and Kresge chains. It is
why Standard Industries, headed by Stone, Webster
and Blodgett, Inc., has been formed to concentrate
on promising enterprises and ‘‘create a new combination
 of business leadership and financial control,”
        <pb n="133" />
        108 The Stock Market Crash—And After
reaching all the way through from raw materials to
manufacture, advertising, and distribution. Profits
due to economies are the lure which brings about a
$200,000,000 consolidation of the express systems
 of Adams, American, and American Railway
Express.
The $550,000,000 holding company of the International
 Paper organization; the movement following
 a ten-year survey, for effecting mergers in the
lumber industry; the Fox chain of motion picture
theatres with its goal of one million seating capacity
in 1929; the merger of Radio Corporation of
America and Victor Talking Machine interests, with
$626,540,000 “to advance the reproducing art”; the
du Ponts’ absorption of the United States Rubber
Company; the formation by the Standard Oil Group
of an export merger under the Webb Act; the union
of six brass concerns to control 20 per cent of the
national output of brass and copper; the merger of
twelve dairy companies in the southwest; a rayon
corporation “to link continents”; a mortgage merger
to cover the nation; the merger of the cosmetic and
perfume industry; the mergers being considered in
the cement industry (the nation’s roads are rapidly
being transformed into cement); the authorized
mergers of the railway systems under the watchful
eye of the Interstate Commerce Commission; the
consolidation of power and light companies; the
many mergers of great banking institutions; the merger
 of both wire and wireless telephone and telegraph
communications advocated by Owen D. Young ;—
        <pb n="134" />
        The Age of Mergers

109

all these show the drift which has become a rush
toward consolidation.
These consolidations, existing and proposed, are
to effect economies and to increase profits. The subsidiary
 companies of the old Standard Oil Company,
which was dissolved in 1911 by decree of the Federal
Supreme Court, have grown into a small group of
billion-dollar companies. The New Jersey and California
 Standard Oil have each securities exceeding a
billion in value, while those of the Indiana company
are close to this sum, and the Standard of New York
has risen to $660,000,000 in market value. The
splitting up of the old company merely produced
giant offspring, with dividends aggregating, during
1928, nearly $220,000,000 for the thirty components.

What will the governmental authorities do with
all these lusty “bigger and better” mergers, which
operate sometimes contrary to the spirit if not to the
letter of the anti-trust laws?
That depends largely on what they do with themselves.
 No doubt holding companies are economically
 valuable in simplifying the financial structures.
They introduce the immensely valuable insurance feature
 of diversification. The problem is: Can monopolies
 and unreasonable restraints of trade be prevented
 while these modern aggregations of capital
use their facilities to gather business statistics, guard
against inflated inventories. standardize their products,
 and arrive at price agreements that prevent
losses formerly sustained by cutthroat competition ?
        <pb n="135" />
        110 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

How to Make Mergers Safe?
President Hoover has provided a method for
making mergers safe, permitting gains to the public
and to investors while eliminating the abuses which
were prevalent in the first era of the trust. Briefly,
it is a method of trade conferences with the government
 which avail themselves of cobperation between
the agencies of the people and private concerns and
whole industries.
In his preélection speech at St. Louis, on November
 2, 1928, Mr. Hoover recounted at length how
this method had worked out as between the Department
 of Commerce and the various industries. He
recalled the agitation in Congress for laws to curb
the lumber industry, saying:
“In 1923, however, we created a series of committees
 among associations in the lumber industry,
at their request. In the course of a gradual extension
over five years we finally perfected a system for the
grading of lumber and for guaranteeing those grades
to the public, which is now carried out wholly by
the lumber industry itself. Consequently during the
last few years there has been no suggestion of such
legislation from Congress. The savings to the public
 in the elimination of waste and fraud have been
estimated by the industry as upwards of $250,000,
000 a year.
“This is a clear case where by coéperative methods
we have avoided the necessity of regulation, with
the bureaucracy and interferences that flow from it.
        <pb n="136" />
        The Age of Mergers I11
It is also a clear case of building up of selfgovernment.”

Similarly, William E. Humphrey, Chairman of
the Federal Trade Commission, has described a
“new policy” of the commission by “codperation and
stipulation,” which gives ‘“‘opportunity for an industry
 to do away with any fraudulent or unfair practice”
 and “to regulate itself, to clean its own house,
to make rules and regulations by common consent”
—in short, to “achieve decency instead of having
the government thrust decency upon it.”
[t seems clear, therefore, that only when resort
to codperation and self-government fails need the
“laws with teeth in them” be invoked under President
 Hoover. Moreover, many exceptions to the
law against restraints of trade have already been
sanctioned by Congress. In the Clayton Act it was
intended to exempt labor unions from the operation
of the anti-trust laws, but the Supreme Court in a
recent decision has so interpreted the law as to destroy
 the exemption. The power to approve agreements
 in “reasonable restraint” of trade made between
 competing American steamship owners fixing
rates and allotting tonnage, was conferred by the
Shipping Board Act. The Federal Reserve Act permits
 banks that compete in this country to cooperate
 in establishing banks abroad. The Webb
Act allows vendors of American merchandise to
combine in search of foreign trade. The Interstate
Commerce Commission possesses large powers to fix
railroad rates in order to prevent competitive rate-
        <pb n="137" />
        112 The Stock Market Crash—And After
cutting. The Capper-Volstead Act empowers agricultural
 associations to fix prices, restrict output, and
limit trading territory. Leading court decisions indicate
 that, should Congress see fit to make reasonable
 price agreements legal, the courts would uphold
them.

Output Needs Controlling
In two basic industries, namely, coal and oil, the
need is acute for authority to form agreements in
order to control production and marketing and thus
prevent the enormous wastes due to overinvestment,
overproduction, collapse of prices followed by shutting
 down of plants, wage reductions, and severe
unemployment.
On the other hand, it is axiomatic that any modification
 of the anti-trust laws should provide for
public supervision and control to prevent great consolidated
 enterprises from setting unreasonable
monopoly prices. Reasonable economy requires that
the extraction of petroleum from the ground should
be carried on in each producing area by an absolute
monopoly instead of by competing companies as at
present. Whether petroleum extraction is carried on
as a government monopoly or a private monopoly
subject to public control, the consumer of gasoline,
and the hundreds of petroleum products must be
protected. Careful estimates must be made of reasonable
 requirements of consumers of these products
and only that quantity of crude petroleum should be
brought to the surface, which will meet those reason-
        <pb n="138" />
        The Age of Mergers 113

able needs. In protecting the consumer, the law
should also protect the producer against cutthroat
competition with its “profitless prosperity” followed
by bankruptcy and curtailment of output, resulting in
prices even higher than would have existed under an
organization to regulate output and prices.
But much has already been done by way of legislation
 to protect producers and consumers against
the wide fluctuations in output and prices in basic
industries. Much has been done, also, through the
agency of the Federal Reserve Board to stabilize
more effectively the general price level for the protection
 of all producers and consumers everywhere
against insidious changes in the value of the dollar,
and consequent losses which cannot be guarded
against by any trade association or combination.
What has been said about the superior economies
of mergers, and the consequent increase in the price
level of their securities during the long bull market,
does not mean that many corporations are not still
on trial before the bar of public opinion. Professor
William Z. Ripley of Harvard University did a public
 service a few years ago in exposing the misleading
or inadequate financial statements from certain large
companies. Professor Ripley contended that visibility
 might be aided by floodlights of publicity at the
point where the Main Street of widespread popular
investment crosses Wall Street. This suggestion, by
the way, was originally advanced with special reference
 to railways more than a generation ago by Professor
 Arthur Twining Hadley, now Presidents
        <pb n="139" />
        114 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
Emeritus of Yale University, and even earlier by
Charles Francis Adams, Js.

Sovereign Remedy of Publicity
Publicity is the sovereign remedy against merger
evils today.
Incidentally it might be pointed out that the real
leader in this movement for greater corporate publicity
 has been the New York Stock Exchange. No
other major stock exchange in the world has adopted
such strict listing requirements in this and other respects,
 or has so ruthlessly disregarded its members’
earning power for the sake of prospective benefits to
the investor from this source. The Exchange is, of
course, unable to control the situation with the same
inclusiveness that a national law could. The difficulty
lies in the fact that incorporations are actually made
by the individual States, and it is difficult, if not impossible,
 to secure uniform standards among them.
The value of fuller corporate publicity has in a
measure been shown in the recent stock market by
the greater stability of railroad than other listed
issues. American railroads must report earnings
frequently under standard methods of bookkeeping
prescribed by the Interstate Commerce Commission.
The investor knows with a railroad security just
about what he is buying. This is by no means the
case with industrial securities, and the investor is
largely forced to speculate on the accuracy of published
 industrial corporation statements. This ap-
        <pb n="140" />
        The Age of Mergers 1135

plies with particular force to statistics on the relationship
 between stock prices and their earnings. Our
best companies particularly have often understated
their earnings by charging off unusual sums for
depreciation, and so on.
Professor Ripley was right in urging on behalf of
one of the minor parties in interest, the stockholders,
publicity of corporate accounts. A true and complete
balance sheet and income account, constituting a
photograph of a company’s present condition and a
lengthwise view of its management through a period
of time, are essentials to be obtained by a stockholders’
 committee or by such agencies as the Federal
Trade Commission.
Doubtless such a requirement in behalf of the investor
 is also in the interest of the consumer. Professor
 Ripley has likened the visitorial committee
of stockholders, as an accomplishment in the field of
finance, to the introduction of the company union in
the field of labor. Thus the management is tied in,
not only with its employees, but with a representative
body of owners. Perhaps some day it may be tied
in, also, with a representative committee of consumers
 entirely independent of the management. With
publicity, the people are increasingly willing to believe,
 with the accumulation of evidence, that it is
best served by large-scale industry engaged in mass
production, with relatively large overhead expenses
and relatively small running expenses. No one
would think today of trying to force Henry Ford to
        <pb n="141" />
        116 The Siock Market Crash—And After
sell his various plants to independent producers and
make them compete with each other. Despite the
fact that this organization has made Ford one of
the richest men in the world, the public appreciates
the fact that he has given them a cheap car. The
economies he and other captains of large industry
have achieved are so surprisingly great that probably
nothing can now stem the rising tide of mass
production.
The big examples of mass production today, as
instanced by Henry Ford, General Motors, Westinghouse
 and General Electric, the great railway systems,
 the big banks and so on, have reduced costs to
the consumer by reducing costs in general. Of course,
their aim has been to increase their own profits; but
this has usually been accomplished not by raising
prices to the consumer but by reducing costs and generally
 even by reducing prices in order to command
broader markets.
To go back to the régime of small fixed charges
and large unit costs would be detrimental to the consumer
 interests of the nation. It would mean wasteful
 production. It would result in-the instabilities
of cutthroat competition. The railroads found out
long ago, as Hadley expressed it, that “sometimes it
pays to run at a loss.” A bankrupt railroad may
change hands, but it cannot go out of business. It
goes into the hands of a receiver, but it still runs;
for to stop running would not stop the interest on
the bonds representing the sunk capital. Today the
enormous sums that are put into mass production
        <pb n="142" />
        The Age of Mergers 117
cannot be withdrawn any more than the ties of a railroad
 can be torn up overnight.
Certain large industries have gained in public
confidence and consequently in the value of their securities
 by publishing ‘important information about
production, earnings, and expenditures. The motion
picture industry and the building industry in New
York are examples. The practice of retaining a
general supervisor to vouch to the public for the
honesty and decency of an industry's policies has
apparently met with success.
The financial reports of certain enlightened corporations,
 such as the United States Steel Corporation,
 General Motors, the Philadelphia Company,
the Standard Gas and Electric Company, the Consolidated
 Cement Corporation and others have especially
 met with general approval as meeting the needs
of the investor and the public. Some organizations
may find it practicable and profitable to satisfy as
fully the consumer interest, by securing independent
certifications as to their products, methods and designs.
 We already have certified milk and other food
and medicinal products, as to healthfulness, and certified
 elevators, boilers, and ships as to safety. The
process might be extended. Such certification might
be obtained under safeguards like those now thrown
about the investigations and reports of public accountants.
 They would represent a substantial advance
in the cause of truth in advertising, with a convincing
 appeal to the most important party in interest,
the consumers, in constantly broadening markets for
        <pb n="143" />
        118 The Stock Market Crash—And After
an age of mass production. The more the industries
 themselves work in these directions, for the
good of the consumer, the less the need of legislative
interference and the greater the chance of their free
development without hampering restrictions and according
 to the requirements of large-scale economy.
        <pb n="144" />
        CHAPTER VIII

SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH AND INVENTION

A PRIME reason for expecting future earnings to
be greater was that we in America were applying
science and invention to industry as we had never
applied them before.
[nventing is now a profession. Invention is today
recognized as having a high cash value and is eagerly
sought after by progressive corporations. The contrast
 with the past, even with a few years ago, is
very great, and the contrast is enormous with a generation
 or a century ago.
We still talk about the wonderful innovations—
power looms, steam engines and locomotives and the
various elements in the English “industrial revolution”
 of the eighteenth century—which had such
a profound effect on business and banking. But let
us see who invented these inventions.
James Watt, inventor of the steam engine, was
not a professional inventor. He was a maker of
mathematical instruments. Richard Arkwright, who
invented the spinning Jenny, was a barber. Edmund
Cartwright, who invented the power loom, was a
clergyman. Robert Fulton, who invented the steamboat,
 was a portrait painter. Invention was not then
110
        <pb n="145" />
        120 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
a vocation and was seldom appreciated until the
inventor was dead and not even then unless the inven.
tion was important.
Even within the memory of men now living the
business world looked askance upon inventors and
upon scientific work in general, which was largely
confined to the universities. The self-made business
man would sometimes say that he would have nothing
 to do with a college-bred man in his establishment.
 On the other hand, the university man of
the academic type, was equally contemptuous of
the man who was merely making money. It is said
of Professor Louis Agassiz that when he was asked
why he did not use his brains to build up a fortune,
he replied that he was too busy to make money.
J. Willard Gibbs, the greatest scientist America ever
produced, the Isaac Newton or Einstein of America,
lived out his days obscure and unappreciated except
among a small group of specialists. It is now said
of Gibbs that unlike any other scientist, none of his
work has ever been undone. It is also said that in
the metallurgical industry alone, billions of dollars
have been made, thanks to J. Willard Gibbs. But
it probably never crossed his mind that he was laying
the foundations for others to make money. His
studies were made from the hope of pure science
alone.
But after 1919, something happened. The implications
 of it are not yet sufficiently gauged. It was
of enough significance to cause President Hoover's
Committee on Recent Economic Changes to remark
        <pb n="146" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 121

that “acceleration rather than structural change is
the key to an understanding of our recent economic
developments.” The committee added: “But the
breadth and scale and ‘tempo’ of recent developments
 gives them new importance.”
What has happened is indicated by the fact that
in the United States, eight million three hundred
thousand workers produced in 1925 one-quarter
more than nine million wage workers turned out
during 1919.
The new indexes of the Federal Reserve Board
measuring industrial production record this gratifying
 advance which reflects an increase in the American
 standard of living. The indexes cover, directly
and indirectly, four-fifths of the industrial production
 of the nation—directly in about thirty-five industries,
 and collaterally in many more. They were
occasioned by the striking increase in recent years of
the output of many industries. Thus the quantity
of automobiles increased by 204 per cent between
1919 and 1925; the output of petroleum refining
advanced by 108 per cent; rubber goods by 59 per
cent; glass by 78 per cent; cement by 101 per cent;
brick, pottery and other clay products by 68 per
cent; chemicals and acids by 36 per cent; paints and
varnishes by 40 per cent; carpets and rugs by 38
per cent; silk goods by 37 per cent; iron, steel and
non-ferrous metals by 32 per cent; and various items
of food, drink, and tobacco by from 6 to 51 per cent.
The general volume of production had increased
between 1919 and 1927, inclusive, by 46.5 per cent;
        <pb n="147" />
        122 The Stock Market Crash—And After
primary power by 22 per cent; and primary power
per wage earner by 30.9 per cent (between 1919
and 1925) and productivity per wage worker by
53.5 per cent between 1919 and 1927. During this
period (1919-1927), wage earners in factories had
decreased by 2.9 per cent, but wages paid increased
by 11.4 per cent (1919-1925). Prime cost increased
(1919-1925) by 7.2 per cent, but unit prime cost
decreased by 24.5 per cent. Productivity per wage
earner, which had increased very slightly between
1899 and 1909 and actually diminished from 1909
to 1919, took an unprecedented leap after 1gar,
recording its increase by more than one-half from
1919 to and including 1927, at the same time that
unit prime costs were diminishing (1919-1925) by
nearly one-quarter.
The measurement of this astounding increase in
production and in values, mainly during the course
of the long bull market, is accurate. The new index
of production of the Federal Reserve Board being
worked by what is I have called the “Ideal Formula”
in my book The Making of Index Numbers, shows
how far, in this machine-power civilization, man is
emancipating himself from the curse of Adam.
From the hewing of wood and the drawing of water,
the sweat and toil of the old slave population, man
has thrust his burden upon the machine. He now
watches the index gauges reveal their welcome
increases in per capita output.
What are the reasons for this throbbing change
since 1919, and especially since 1922?
        <pb n="148" />
        RELATIONSHIP oF PRIME COST, PHYSICAL VOLUME oF
PRODUCTION, AND UNIT PRIME COST

800

500

INDEX NULBER (1899=100)

400

0C

4
‘3

PRIME COST

5
*

ap w—
- ;
0DUCTION 44 7 PRIME =

00

—m——
1904 1909
CHART 14.—By prime cost is meant the sum of labor and material costs. During the period 1919-1925,
 large scale production and sales combined with increased product per man to reduce sharply unit
orime cost after it had risen for 20 years.

1019 192] 1823 1925 1927
        <pb n="149" />
        124 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

Scientific Workers in Industry

After the war there was an exodus of professors
capable of scientific research from the universities
into industry. This was chiefly what may be called
an accident, due to war inflation. Professors’ salaries
 had lost their purchasing power. There was
a similar exodus from the scientific bureaus of the
government in Washington. In order to live, research
 students and professors turned increasingly
to the higher emoluments of industry, and industry
soon found that it had tapped a new and vast
resource in human ingenuity backed by scientific
training. For almost the first time science in America
 came to be appreciated for its cash value, the
more so, perhaps, because the war had revealed how
much farther Germany had made use of such technical
 science and invention than the rest of the world.
Another accidental cause of accelerating “tempo”
of invention was that the war left wages I1§ per
cent above the previous level and the cost of living
only 70 per cent above it. Employers feared to cut
wages, lest strikes and diminished output result, and
they turned to labor-saving inventions instead. Thus
a by-product of inflation, as in the case of the university
 professors, was pushed into industry to great
economic advantage.
In the past few years the industries have added
gigantic research laboratories to their equipment.
In the laboratory of the American Telephone and
Telegraph Company today there are 4,000 scientific
        <pb n="150" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 125
men—more than any university could equal. Industry
 has realized that the continued development of
modern life, with its comforts and conveniences,
depends upon scientific research. Inventions due to
research are now the chief breadwinners of our
industrial system.
Already more than three hundred substances indispensable
 to our life today are produced as by-products
 of the distillation of coal. Chemists have found
hundreds of new uses for the former waste of the
farm, which used to be so hard to dispose of. One
of the chief topics of discussion today wherever
employers, workers, engineers, scientists, bankers or
educators gather together is scientific research.
At a recent meeting of the New York State Chamber
 of Commerce, Dr. Robert A. Millikan, one of
the world’s foremost physicists, took occasion to
quote the words of Pasteur: “In our century science
is the soul of the prosperity of nations, and the living
 source of all progress. Undoubtedly the tiring
discussions of politics seem to be our guide—empty
appearances. What really leads us forward is a few
scientific discoveries and their application.”

Edison as a Forerunner

The fiftieth anniversary of the work of Thomas
A. Edison, in bringing forth the incandescent lamp,
was celebrated during the summer and fall of 1929.
As an inventor and organizer of inventive research,
Edison is the symbol of the entrance of science into
the industrial renaissance. His latest announcement
        <pb n="151" />
        126 The Stock Market Crash—And After
of the invention of synthetic rubber derived from
the common goldenrod is a triumph of organized
research. Even at its comparatively high cost this
invention of rubber would have checked the exactions
of the foreign rubber monopolists and defeated the
British plan for restriction of rubber output had it
been brought out when Mr. Hoover, then Secretary
of Commerce, was inveighing against their monopoly.
 Mr. Edison’s researches with the object of
further cheapening synthetic rabber are in process;
in this his great staff may yet achieve another triumph
 that will be reflected in added economies and
higher values of securities of the rubber industry.
The life of Edison really links the past, when
science was scarcely appreciated, to the present when
it is almost idolized. He was the first conspicuous
professional inventor. The chief significance of this
recent celebration of Edison by the world is not in
his own singular contribution to progress, but in
the extent of the appreciation of invention by the
public.
This change, most of which has occurred since
the war, and a great part of which has occurred
during the time when prices doubled during the long
bull market, is reflected in the congestion and recongestion
 in the Patent Office. Under Mr. Hoover,
when he was Secretary of Commerce, the Patent
Office had been reorganized in order to catch up with
its work. But by the end of the fiscal year 1928-1929,
 the Commissioner of Patents reported that
the “number of cases now awaiting action (103,236)
        <pb n="152" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 127

is so great that at this rate of gain it would take
from five to six years to make the work practically
current, or so that an applicant who is paying the
fees for performing the work may obtain an official
action with reasonable promptness.” In this report
the Commissioner, Thomas E. Robertson, said:
“Tt is a noteworthy fact that more patents have
been granted during the last ten years than during
the 100 years from President Washington's inauguration
 in 1789 until President Harrison's inauguration
 in 1889.”

Daily News of Inventions
Pick up the daily paper, and note the multiplying
reports of new inventions and processes and business
methods that are the outcome of scientific research.
Almost every day's paper gives half a dozen new
instances showing how inventions and the exploitation
 of them through the use of capital are affecting
 savings, producing short cuts and increased productivity.
 A cable despatch from Berlin tells of a
new method of producing synthetic helium by which
Germany may be freed from the United States,
where the chief natural supply exists. The same
despatch announces an interoceanic line of Zeppelins,
which will require capital. The same paper tells of
successful experiments in perfecting the seadrome;
so that the model will be succeeded by a real seadrome,
 weighing some 40,000 tons, to be towed out
350 miles from shore and anchored. The account
adds that it will cost $1,500,000,000. Money must
        <pb n="153" />
        128 The Stock Market Crash—And After
always be raised to develop inventions, and the
process usually adds to the volume of debt including
brokers’ loans.
In the same paper there is the announcement of
a new all-air line between New York and Los
Angeles, spanning the continent in thirty-six hours.
On another page is a report that in Poland a rivetless
 bridge has been constructed by a new process
of welding. There is also the news account of: the
distillation of coal to make fuel oil. An expert
announces that the railroads are saving coal; one
line uses 70 pounds now to 170 pounds used ten
years ago.
There is the recent announcement of the front
drive car that is “pulled, not pushed” by its engine.
There is the announcement by S. T. Bloom, a consulting
 engineer, of Chicago, that important new appliances
 in refrigeration will soon result in the quick
freezing of retail meat-cuts, fruits, vegetables, dairy
products—in fact, of every perishable foodstuff, and
that office buildings, hotels, large stores, and even
homes will soon be refrigerated in summer as they
are heated in winter. Cornstalks have been recently
utilized to make pulp for the production of newsprint
 paper, and now the chemists at the University
of Illinois announce that the refuse from this process
may be turned into gas for use on farms. A system
of television is being adapted for broadcast service
in the homes.
The largest and most powerful oil-electric locomotive
 in the world, a hurtling power plant, with-
        <pb n="154" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 129
out need of a costly third rail or overhead wire
system, generates the power it consumes on the
Canadian National Railways. Some 300,000,000
pounds of artificial silk, known as rayon among silk
manufacturers, was made from cellulose during
1929. Elmer A. Sperry, inventor of the gyroscope
compass, super-power searchlights and airway beacons,
 has just adapted an electrical machine for testing
 the rails of the great railways’ system of the
nation. A “Robot chemist” or an automaton with
an electric eye, radio brains and magnet hands
recently functioned without human supervision in an
improvised laboratory before the New York Electrical
 Society in New York. It helped in producing
an economic cold light, in analyzing a sample weighing
 a millionth of a gram, and in demonstrating a
photo-electric cell used to control analysis in new
scientific apparatus.
Samuel W. Parr states that the American output
of chemical products alone has advanced in fifty
years from an insignificant sum to more than $2,000,-000,000
 annually.
The American Chemical Society reports a tremendous
 increase in research by which pure and
practical science has been advanced, and calls for
half a million dollars more for the fund to report
scientific knowledge. In his address at Dearborn,
Michigan, on October 21, 1929, President Hoover
said: “If we would have our country improve its
standard of living and at the same time accommos
date itself to increasing population, we must main-
        <pb n="155" />
        130 The Stock Market Crash—dnd After
tain, on an even more liberal scale than ever before,
our great laboratories of both pure and applied
science.”
The extent to which industrial research prevails
as a new trend in manufacturing progress in the
United States is revealed in the survey of the
National Bureau of Economic Research, published
in 1929 as part of the report on Recent Economic
Changes of the President's Unemployment Conference,
 of which Mr. Hoover was chairman. Of the
599 manufacturing concerns supplying information,
the report states, 52 per cent recorded the carrying
on of research as a company activity; testing laboratories
 were conducted by an additional 7 per cent,
leaving 41 per cent, or a minority, in which research
work had not yet been initiated. These statistics
were based on a questionnaire, sent out during 1928
to 5000 manufacturing concerns with a commercial
rating of one million dollars or over.
In certain industries, such as cement manufacture,
leather tanning, gas and electric utilities, codperative
research had been organized, taking advantage of
the activities of various national associations. In
certain other industries such as the manufacture of
machinery, machine tools, drugs, cosmetics and pharmaceuticals,
 individual concerns engaged in highly
competitive work were carrying on their own laboratories.
 Some 58 per cent of those reporting stated
that their budgets for research were increasing from
year to year, and 39 per cent reported that their
research activities had already shown a profit.
        <pb n="156" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 131
The very names of many of the standard stocks
on the Stock Exchange symbolize this new inventive
and scientific era; as, for instance, the radio, airplane
 and motion picture stocks, such as Radio Corporation,
 Curtiss-Wright, and Fox Films. A vast
number, whose names are not so indicative, are just
as definitely founded on new inventions—such as
Maytag and Remington-Rand, while a still larger
number, while of older vintage, such as American
Telephone and Telegraph, General Electric, Allied
Chemical and Dye, and Johns-Manville, have recently
 transferred or added to their processes new
inventions.
A whole group of companies are exploiting inventions
 for the supremely important purpose of increasing
 power and effecting mergers on the basis of
economies achieved through these inventions. Martin
 J. Insull, the Chicago power magnate, states that
as a consequence of the added power which invention
 has contributed to industry, the forty-five and
one-half million workers in the United States have
achieved an output equivalent to from six hundred
million to nine hundred million workers before the
power era.

Greater Productivity Per Unit
By the enterprise of Mr. Insull, who is a chief
executive of the electric power companies distributing
power over sections of the Middle West, a flood of
light is poured upon a main cause of America’s
recent prosperity. This appears in a study entitled
        <pb n="157" />
        132 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
America’s New Frontier published by the Middle-West
 Utilities Company. This company serves four
thousand communities of less than ten thousand
population,
Mr. Insull finds a tremendous saving in the far
greater productivity per unit of electric power dis-ELECTRICITY

 DISPLACES OTHER POWER

INDUSTRIAL POWER
USA

80)

OTHER
\"

PURCHASED
Coarere]

"REN
JE

_ PURCHASED
ELECTRICAL POWER
PERCENT OF ALL
POWER USED IN
INDUSTRY

20

30

20

oO

dui
IRQ0

14).

[=]

0
it~ 5 1925 1927

CHART 15~—Total primary factory power applied through electric
motors increased, 1919-1927, from 55 per cent to 78 per cent. Inset:
50 per cent purchased, 28 per cent made locally.

tributed to small communities, as compared with
power units in the congested cities.
Until 1910-1912, neither steam power nor early
electric power could be distributed beyond the length
of the leather transmission belt. Invention came
in to permit long-distance transmission. Until then
the big cities had had it all their own way in manufacturing.
 Only compact populations could use such
        <pb n="158" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 133

power cheaply. The farms and small towns were
part of the vast American hinterland, isolated,
bucolic, remote from the currents of progress. Civilization
 was based on power, but it was distinctly
urban. Up to twenty years ago the burden of the
world’s work had, it is true, been largely shifted
from the backs of men to machines by power generated
 by the burning of fuel or the force of waterfalls.
 Then came mobile electric transmission.
Along with it came the speeding of transportation
of men and materials on railroads and by means of
automobiles. A vast accession of usable power,
accelerating every business transaction and means of
human intercourse, is now being distributed at the
point where it can be used most economically. It
is spread more evenly over the land, relieving
congestion in one place, remedying sparseness in
another.
Distributable electric power travels with lightning
speed. Qualities by which it quickens decentralizing
tendencies in our industries are defined by Owen D.
Young, as mobility, divisibility, applicability, and
reliability. President Glenn Frank, of the University
 of Wisconsin, contrasts its advantages with
steam ‘power in these words: “In a machine civilization
 created by steam power, the worker must go to
the power; but in a machine civilization created by
electric power, the power can be taken to the
worker.”
The late Guy E. Tripp, Chairman of the Board
of the Westinghouse Electric Company, was one of
        <pb n="159" />
        134 The Stock Market Crash—And After
the first to discern the possibilities of the network
of more than one hundred thousand miles of high
voltage electric power lines, distributing energy over
a large part of the United States, and making it an
asset, not only in the big cities, but available at
almost any point on the map. To this Mr. Tripp
added the advantages of improved transportation—
the faster rail service, the automobile and the highway
 systems, all of which made transportation flexible
 as well as more speedy.
These causes work together to explain why the
present gain in number of industrial wage earners
is vivifying, as it were, the extremities of the nation,
in the towns of less than 10,000 population. The
smaller communities are living richer lives. They
have better schools, they have built new highways.
Nearly every family owns a car. Its members visit
the metropolitan centers, but they return to the
“open spaces” with all the amenities of the city.
The amount of primary factory power applied
through electric motors has increased from 5 per
cent in 1899 to 39 per cent in 1914, and to 78 per
cent in 1927. The increase exceeds one-fifth since
1919.
By the same speeding process the motor car has
increased prosperity and added to expectations of
gains in real income. It has created the modern
suburb, freeing it from the limited area around the
railroad station. At the beginning of 1929 there
were 5,426,900 motor vehicles on farms. Of these,
697,300 were motor trucks, and 4,729,600 were
        <pb n="160" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 135
automobiles. Both the car and truck alike contribute
 to the fullness of life on the modern farm.
The truck permits rapid haulage to the railways and
prompt shipping to whatever markets offer the best
demand at the moment. The motor car not only
saves the farmer's time (a vital matter in view of
labor shortage) but also gives his wife and children
contact with the social advantages of the town.
Churches, lectures, schools and the theater are all
available to the family which owns a car.
As a consequence of this inventive triumph, road
construction is going forward in the total yearly
investment of $1,500,000,000 for construction and
maintenance. American surfaced highways now
total 625,000 miles, which is approximately onetenth
 of all the highways in the world, surfaced or
otherwise.
The automobile industry has “hooked up” with
other revolutionary inventions, the radio, motion
and sound pictures, and the network of telephone,
telegraph and the electric traction lines, purveying
to the fundamental need of communication of all
sorts. This is responsible for the great real estate
developments that have taken place along parkways
and suburban boulevards.
The transformation into a motorized existence
helps further to explain the increased “tempo” of
production and the rapid accretion in value of the
securities of all industries that have been affected
by the speeding-up processes of scientific research
and invention.
        <pb n="161" />
        136 The Stock Market Crash—And After

Savings of Packing Industry
It is said of the packing industry that it utilizes
“all of the pig but the squeal.” The cost of beef,
pork and lamb to the consumer is today much less
than it would be had not the packing industries
organized on a large scale and utilized every part
of the slaughtered animal to increase their income
and pay the costs of production. These costs were
formerly paid for by the meat, the hides, and to a
limited extent by the fat, bones and horns. Now
every part of the animal contributes its quota to
the total revenue.
The effect of utilizing these waste products is
often to increase the income received by the farmer
for his crops, as well as to lower the price of the
staple crops to the manufacturer and consumer. In
future, factories may well be located in rural districts
 near the sources of the raw materials that have
heretofore been wasted. Costs of farm products
will be distributed over a large number of new prodacts
 which now bring in nothing, and often entail
costs up the farmer to get rid of them.

An Agricultural Revolution

Research is bringing about an agricultural revolution,
 which is of special significance in this discussion
 of enhanced values, since agriculture is the
source of nearly all food and most raw materials
utilized by man.
Economists classify agriculture as an extractive
        <pb n="162" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 137

industry, subject to the tyranny of the law of
“decreasing returns.” At a given stage of the science
 and art of agriculture, additional bushels of
wheat or of any other crop could be wrested from
the soil only with a disproportionately increased
expenditure of labor and capital. If there were no
changes in the methods of agriculture, foodstuffs
and other raw materials and products of the farm
must continuously advance in price as population
increases and the demand for farm products grows.
But this, which was the logic of Ricardo, Malthus
and their followers, implies that practices and appliances
 remain unchanged. Under such assumptions
the theory is correct. But economists cannot reckon
without taking account of the scientific researchers
and inventors who have revolutionized agriculture
half a dozen times since the eighteenth century,
until today scientific farming has been transformed
almost into a manufacturing industry.
Subsoil plowing, better fertilizers, better breeds
of farm animals, new and improved crops, utilization
 of waste products, and, last and most important,
improved means of transportation have increased
manifold the area and productivity of economic
land since Ricardo laid down his famous law of rent,
based upon the “permanent and indestructible qualities
 of the soil.”
Agricultural chemists long ago taught the farmer
the value of soil analysis for showing what lands
are suited to particular crops, what kinds of fertilizer
 to use. These chemists have found hundreds
        <pb n="163" />
        138 The Stock Market Crash—And After
of new uses for the former wastes of the farm, which
used to be so hard to dispose of. Cottonseed, which
formerly was a nuisance, is now a crop second only
in value to the cotton fiber itself. The cellulose of
straw is now being worked up into wallboard and
building material. Up to the present our corn fields
have produced only a single crop, corn, to repay the
farmer for his toil and capital outlay. The cornstalks,
 heretofore largely waste, are now being made
into writing paper and other papers of excellent
quality, while from the corncobs come furfural,
which may supplement or supersede gasoline in our
motor cars and gas engines. Bagasse, the waste of
sugarcane, makes a standard wallboard.
How revolutionary inventions for farming have
become is seen in the new Mason Process of drying
alfalfa. This invention permits “making hay while
it rains” as well as while the sun shines, and makes
practicable the growing of this main forage crop
in the states of heavy rainfall in the East, where
the chief dairy herds are located. It is reducing a
dairy system from the need of devoting ten to one
hundred acres to pasture per cow to a system whereby
three animals can be kept in prime condition on one
acre. In his forthcoming book, The Great Food
Problem and Its Solution, Dr. Orrin W. Willcox,
calculates that the earth’s population may increase
in almost unbelievable numbers through application
of recently discovered laws of plant growth, chemical
 fertilization, and transmutation of food properties.
 These, combined with selection of plants with
        <pb n="164" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 139
highest power to absorb nutrients from the soil, Dr.
Willcox says, may permit a maximum density of population
 of ninety-six thousand people per square
mile!
What has been said of farming is also true of
other basic industries. The wastes of our forest
areas have become and will become increasingly the
sources of foodstuffs, of specialized building matevials
 and of chemicals of great value. If research
and invention should cease, the Malthusian law of
population might begin to. operate rigorously and
property grow apace. But we are only just beginning
 to scratch at the surface of the earth for the
material conveniences and sources of power which
can be made to minister to our needs and comforts.
Our continued progress in well-being rests absolutely
 upon the ability of the chemists, physicists
and engineers to- extract further utilities from the
earth faster than the ever-growing population can
consume them.
But the rate at which they have accelerated this
process in recent years readily accounts for the
increased real income of the nation, which, with
its prospects of still greater income, have warranted
the higher plateau of securities by which the nation’s
industries and economies are valued. The prospects
of still greater income need emphasizing. The difficulty
 in most cases has been that the securities
affected by inventions and rapid growth have often
been sold at high prices after and not before the
greatest ratio of growth took place. It is future
        <pb n="165" />
        140. The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

growth, not past growth, that gives value. In recent
years the stock market has reflected increasingly
through the operations of investment counsel and
investment trusts, more intelligent calculations of
future growth.

Effect of Invention on Price-Earnings Ratio
The effect of new inventions on the ratio of the
price of stocks to earnings is to increase that ratio,
because what gives these new stocks their value is
the future earnings after the new process will have
had time. This necessarily implies that, in the meantime,
 the earnings are so small that the price-earnings
 ratio is high. For instance, the public utilities,
up to the September and October breaks in the
market, showed a ratio of prices to-earnings of more
than 20 to 1. That is, the prices of stocks were
over twentyfold the earnings. The reason for this
high level of prices relative to earnings lay partly
in the increased gains to be expected in the spread
of application of new inventions through the power
group of industries. There has been much careless
talk, since the crash, about stock prices having been
inflated far above what earnings warrant. But the
people who say this so glibly do not specify the
particular stocks. When any actual stock is examined
 with an unusually high price relative to its current
 earnings it is almost invariably found that it
tepresents a new and very promising invention, and
that those who have bought the stock and put its
price so high are not so much the ignorant public
        <pb n="166" />
        Scientific Research and Invention 141
as the insiders, who have carefully weighed and
measured the future prospects, and who have bought
the stock when the current earnings were near zero,
making a price-earnings ratio of even over 100 to I
for the time being. That is what happens whenever
 one ‘‘gets in on the ground floor.”
The more recent the invention, the higher the ratio
of price to- earnings is apt to be, because in its early
stages the earnings have not had time to develop.
It follows that the larger the number of stocks
representing new inventions in the price index, as
compared with the number of stocks of the ordinary
variety, the higher the price-earnings ratio of the
whole group. It further follows that today, with
so many more of these new-invention companies
listed on the stock exchange, the price-earnings ratio
should be higher than formerly. With the increased
application of research, American investors are justified
 in greater expectations of future dividends.
        <pb n="167" />
        CHAPTER IX

INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT

ANOTHER potent reason for the long bull market
since 1922 is closely affiliated with that of scientific
research and invention emphasized in the last chapter.
 This added reason is industrial management.
Frederick Taylor is coming into his own today.
Taylor, like other pioneers and inventors of the past,
was not appreciated during his lifetime. He died
of a broken heart, especially because the laboring
men, the men he was trying most to help, regarded
industrial management and stop-watches as a means
of further “exploitation.”
Under other names Taylor's methods and ideals,
as developed by H. L. Gantt, Morris L. Cooke,
Wallace Clark, Henry S. Dennison, the Gilbreths,
and others, are coming into effect. President
Hoover has had his Committee on the Elimination
of Waste. We also recognize management engineering
 in what is called “mass production.” Big business
 is coming to be not only tolerated but appreciated.
 The “Fordizing” of business is nearly synonymous
 with developed management engineering.
Data pertaining to business management, obtained
by the experts of the National Bureau of Economic
142
        <pb n="168" />
        Industrial Management 143

Research under the supervision of Henry S. Dennison,
 are presented in the report of President
Hoover's Committee on Recent Economic Changes,
as the result of interviews with five hundred people
employed by one hundred different concerns, chosen
as samples of normal, successfully established businesses
 in the United States. These were large and
small companies making moderate to notable successes
 in a variety of businesses in different sections
of the country, and the survey is believed by the
Committee to be a fair example of the group of
American business men whose management practices
would be considered the prevailing ones. The
report states:
“The last few years have been extremely favorable
 in many ways for the development of those
intellectual, moral, and social attitudes which lead
toward high professional standing. The situation
of today holds all the opportunity anyone could
desire for the wholesome development of business
management into a great profession.
“The greater complexity of business problems
and of the organization necessary to cope with them,
have forced attention upon better methods of coordinating
 the plans and the work of specialists and
executives. Where there are research men, staff
men and operating men, a close mutual understanding
 and counseling among them has been found necessary,
 whether it is effected by formally arranged
conferences and committees, or, as one executive
put it, ‘by a great use of shoe leather.’
        <pb n="169" />
        144 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

“Under a pervasive one-man control, where the
chief executive disposes of all important questions,
such codrdination is, in theory, effected through that
man. But the trend is definitely away from control
by one man; and even where it exists, his absences
may force department heads into conference so frequently
 that they have, in effect, a system of regular
operating committees.”
In the hands of such committees management engineering
 has become a keen instrument. What it
means to the captains of industry who are reorganizing
 their shops and programing their needs months
and years ahead—with resultant discounts on future
earnings that increase the value of their securities
in the present—may be shown by quoting from Wallace
 Clark. Mr. Clark is a disciple of the late
Henry L. Gantt, who, with Carl Barth, was closely
associated with Frederick W. Taylor during Taylor’s
 latter years. Mr. Clark was a member of the
Kemmerer Commission which reported on the reconstruction
 of finances of Poland, and he recommended
a reorganization of Poland’s industries by modern
methods. For three years he has been aiding the
installation of these methods in Poland, Germany,
France, Roumania, Switzerland, and Czechoslovakia.
I put a series of questions to Mr. Clark concerning
his experience, as to the practical benefits resulting
from the scientific organization of industrial enterprises.
 The questions together with his answers are
subjoined.
        <pb n="170" />
        MANAGERIAL CONTROL

INAMCIAL SCHEDULE
TAN TES aR APH FIN

LAU

OAL OLIGO
[OTAL INCOMF

OPERATING CONTRO

_ _ gis
oe
—APOUAGE IN S10P je
 emrmrm CELIYERY PROMAEN ©

YOR AEAD or 0 2rd
\MBEAS mecriven -
CC BUAINESS COMDITIONMS

BERATING OATH.
— FACTORY COATA
—OUERMEAD EXPENSE
a CAPARITX MAR —
—IDLEMESS COST
SANYENYORIES
—BUAPLUS. S_ARALTIANS.
— EITHESANALS
CAPITAL ACEOMNIA
ADDITIONS a
re ARE
_-mn
 AESIRENTA or
—Arey gumar
a EUTERED EMPLOY ......
w—EARNINGY {AYFHAGEY
MAM RECORDS

wi

St Td rev

PRODUCTIO

WAR] AF aay | Juke
oy HEHE :
ann
OT
JPET:
dT a H
1 &amp;amp;
oon
Ti
x.
JL
J

aT

in]

1,

—— p=-

 58,000
~52,000~—
48,000 =m
+ 44,000
«£0,000 —
-26,000—
-32,000 ~

_— | MAR{APR | MAY ; von | vin | AUG | SPT] OCT [NOV | DEC.

CHART 16.—Gantt chart as used by Wallace Clark, Consulting
Engineer. This is included, not for detailed study by the general
reader, but merely to illustrate how modern business is technically
guided and controlled by well-conceived management mechanisms.

[AG
        <pb n="171" />
        146 The Stock Market Crash—dnd After

Results of Management Methods

“Does it take long to introduce scientific method
in a business or industrial enterprise?”
“No. The second day of the introduction of
management engineering in an industrial enterprise
yields practical benefits. The first day has been
taken up with ascertaining facts, and the next morning,
 when action is taken on these facts, results
begin to be realized in increased production and
reduced costs.
“It is not necessary to learn all the facts in regard
to a plant before taking action. There is nearly
always some department which is giving the most
trouble, and invariably some of this trouble is found
in the machines or equipment. Even one day's record
 of the idleness of machines and the reasons for
it, provides enough information to enable an executive
 to increase the running time of his equipment,
This is when machines are down for repairs or
waiting for tools, materials, or operators. When
idleness of equipment is due to lack of orders, it
takes more time to secure practical benefits because
the sales department must study the needs of
customers.”
“Can you give an example of this relation of sales
to running equipment?
“In a spinning mill the greatest idleness was found
to be in the doubling machines, and the reason was
lack of orders. This fixed responsibility on the
sales department, which then made a study of the
        <pb n="172" />
        Eo 1
Va

Industrial Management 7, Z
market and found that it could not cc szuously £
absorb the product of all these doubling waghines. 2
Accordingly, twenty per cent of the machi te
dismantled, and those which remained took caré€
normal requirements except in occasional peaks of
demand, when a second shift was run. The space
released by taking out the doubling machines was
used for additional spinning frames for which profitable
 orders were secured; and costs were reduced
because it was no longer necessary to spread over
their product the expense of maintaining the doubling
machines in idleness.”
“Can obstacles which interfere with the workers
be quickly ascertained and acted upon?”
“Very quickly. These obstacles, physical or mental,
 are usually revealed by variations in the quantity
 or quality of a man’s daily output. A record
which shows promptly and clearly why a man is not
able to reach an agreed standard, is the information
needed to reduce these obstacles.
“In another department of this same spinning
mill, the man record charts showed that the machine
operators did not regularly turn out a full day’s
work. Investigation showed that the lighting was
poor, the ventilation insufficient. Floors were rough
and uneven, finished product was placed where it
interfered with feeding machines, operators were
required to clean their machines and a part of the
floor, which distracted their attention from connecting
 broken threads. The management installed better
 lighting, improved ventilation, and assigned spe-
        <pb n="173" />
        148 The Stock Market Crash—And After
cial girls to clean machines and floors, and provided
 containers to hold finished products. The
speed of the machines was not changed and nothing
was said to the operators about increasing their output,
 but as these time-consuming obstacles were
removed, they increased production within a month
by 42 per cent, and greatly improved quality. The
wages of the operators increased automatically
because they were on piecework. The management
found that costs were reduced in spite of the investment
 in improvements.”

Technique of Improved Layout
“Does management stop with revealing the obstacles
 to a free flow of work through a manufacturing
plant 2”
“Management does not stop here. It has developed
 a technique of clearing the way for a more
swift-flowing stream of material by improving the
layout of the plant, by eliminating unnecessary handling
 of material, by better planning and scheduling,
and by more effective direction of a business as a
whole.”
“How is the layout of a manufacturing plant
determined?”
“By the flow of work through that plant; that is,
the movement of material from one process to
another. It is necessary to know the processes
through which the material must pass, their sequence,
the machines or equipment required, and, if the
        <pb n="174" />
        Industrial Management 149

product is varied, the volume of the various kinds
of work.
“In any manufacturing plant there are certain
things which must have fixed locations, such as walls
and columns of buildings, doors, machines and
equipment. The problem of plant layout is to
arrange and locate these things which are fixed so
that the route traveled by the material will be as
short as possible and its progress smooth and rapid.
The degree of accuracy with which the fixed equipment
 is located in relation to the flow of work determines
 the degree of economy which can be secured
in the operation of the finished plant.
“A good layout is important to the management
because it saves money and reduces the time required
to manufacture goods. A proper layout increases
the satisfaction of the workman in his job, because
he does not have to spend a part of his day in taking
steps or making motions that are unnecessary,
hence he can direct more energy into his productive
effort.
Obviously it is more easy to secure a good layout
when erecting a new building than when rearranging
 an old one. But it is more often necessary to
make use of an existing building and great savings
are made possible by a careful study of this
problem.”
“In the process of making a silver-plated candlestick
 it traveled by a route 4000 meters long. This
route was shortened by relocating the equipment.
        <pb n="175" />
        150 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
No changes were made in the processes nor in the
walls of the building, which belonged more than a
century ago to one of Napoleon’s marshals of cavalry.
 By this new arrangement the distance traveled
by the candlestick was reduced from 4000 meters
to 875 meters.”

Two Kinds of Factory Planning
“What are the benefits of planning for the future,
in production, selling and financing?”
“In manufacturing there are two kinds of planning:
 first, for continuous production, and, second,
for varied products.
“In a plant which is built around a moving assembly
 the operations of assembling are subdivided until
they require approximately equal amounts of time.
The length of the moving platform or belt, which
carries the material, and the rate at which it moves,
are then determined and the number of feet this
belt moves per minute becomes the master schedule
of the plant.
“The rate of production per hour or per day
for every department is thus set mechanically, and
the task of the Planning Department consists mainly
in foreseeing and preventing interruptions.
“This mechanical type of scheduling usually entails
a heavy investment in material-handling equipment
or in special machinery, and is therefore economical
only in cases where the products are thoroughly
standardized and are manufactured in large quantities.
 Mass production can never become such an
        <pb n="176" />
        Industrial Management I51

important feature in Europe as in America, because
no single country of Europe has the large consuming
public which exists in the United States. while, in
addition, the habits of different nationalities and
the customs barriers limit the markets.
“In the second type of scheduling the necessary
time is reserved on the various machines which are
to do the work on the product, so that when the
material is released from the stores-room, it moves
through the shop at a definite rate of speed and
is ready for delivery on a predetermined date.
Scheduling of this kind is used in plants that manufacture
 diversified products, of which the volume
is not sufficiently large to make mechanical scheduling
 economical.
“Tt is this type of scheduling which is particularly
applicable to handicraft industries, and it is securing
as remarkable results in Europe as it has in America
in the increased turnover of capital.”

Plans for Sales and Financing
“Do the plans comprise sales and finances as well
as production?”
“This is necessary, for great losses may be incurred
 if production, sales and finances are not
coérdinated and planned in advance.
“For example, in one plant the management had
concentrated its attention on increasing production
and reducing the cost, giving no thought to sales
antil it was suddenly discovered that the stores-rooms
contained as much finished goods as could be sold
        <pb n="177" />
        152 The Stock Market Crash—And After
in a year. As a result the factory had to be closed
down for ten months.
“In another plant the sales ran away with the
production and the output was sold 18 months in
advance, at a time when prices were rising. Wages
and costs of material went up so that for this 18-month
 period there was an actual loss. Both of these
cases were due to a lack of co6rdination between production
 and sales.
“But a curve in a broken line can be projected showing
 the expected sales, say, of a popular standardized
product where the sales were always low during the
summer and high in the autumn. A solid line would
show the production schedule planned to meet the
expected sales. In a particular instance the processes
required a great deal of skill, and it was, of course,
impossible to discharge workers in the summer and
get them back in the autumn. Hence it was planned
to continue manufacturing throughout the summer
and place the product in cold storage ready for the
large sales in October and November. This even
schedule reduced the cost of production but increased
the investment in inventories during the summer.
“In order to find out in advance how much money
would be required from the banks for this purpose,
the expected receipts were charted in comparison
with the expenditures for material, labor and overhead.
 It was found that money was received in bank
usually about 60 days after the goods were sold.
The chart showed that at the end of September additional
 financing would be necessary to the extent of
        <pb n="178" />
        Industrial Management 153
about $40,000. Another chart showed that money
would come in faster than it would go out during
November and December, and that the surplus at
the end of the year would equal normal expenses for
about a month and a half.
“This is a simple example of how manufacturing,
sales and finances can be codrdinated by methods of
planning. It is not often appreciated that the
methods and costs of distributing products frequently
 need even more careful analysis and planning
 than manufacturing. Good scheduling of
finances makes possible a greatly increased volume of
business with the same working capital.”

Master-Charting for Executives
“Can the executives keep in touch with all phases
of operations?”
“There are charts which greatly simplify the problems
 of executives as industries increase in size and
as problems of production and selling normally become
 more complex and difficult. These charts relieve
 the executive from detail, and yet bring
promptly to his attention those things on which it is
important that he take action. There is a technique
of executive direction which not only tells him what
is happening, but shows the tendencies so clearly
that he can foresee and control the future.
“For example, there is the chief executive of a
company which makes refrigerators. First, a plan
was drawn up for the year covering the most important
 phases of the business such as: orders, ship-
        <pb n="179" />
        154 The Stock Market Crash—And After
ments, work ahead of the plant, inventories of raw
materials and of finished product, costs and other
data.
“The figures in the monthly spaces represented
the quantities planned for each month. A light
line showed what was actually done during the
month, and a heavy line showed that cumulative result
 compared with the plan. If everything had been
done as planned, all the heavy lines would end under
a large “V”,
“This chart showed the chief executive that, al
though the orders had been exceeding the quota,
there was very little work ahead of his plant and
that he had on hand a stock of finished goods equal to
five months of normal sales. He, therefore, undertook
 a more intensive selling campaign. The value
of such a chart lies in the fact that the chief executive
has before him absolute facts, and he does not need
to rely on the opinions or impressions of others.
“Similar charts are being used in government and
private industries by executives who direct a number
 of plants which make different products so closely
related that any lack of progress in one immediately
affects the others. From a single chart of this kind a
single executive directs the progress of iron mines,
blast furnaces, a rolling mill, a foundry and a large
machine shop.”
“Does this process of planning and coérdination
do away with preconceived notions?”
“As the scientific organization of a business enterprise
 progresses and the methods described are used
        <pb n="180" />
        Industrial Management 155

to remove obstacles to a free flow of work, the personnel
 gets used to dealing with fact. Their continuing
 success in securing predetermined results by
using these facts brings them to a point where they
base all their decisions on facts. This scientific attitude
 toward the problems of business frees them
from tradition and prejudice.
“Every business man who has had experience in a
specific line of work arrives at certain conclusions as
to what things are wise to do and what are not wise.
However, some men carry these conclusions over into
conditions where they do not fit the facts, and the
conclusions then become prejudices. The scientific
point of view is that each situation is different, and
must be met by judgment and experience which are
not influenced by prejudice.
“Of the many benefits resulting from the scientific
organization of an industrial enterprise one of the
most fundamental is this scientific attitude toward
the problems of business. This might seem to be an
intangible advantage, but it is possibly the most practical
 of all. With this attitude an organization is no
longer held back by the man who regards as impossible
 things which have not been done before; nor by
the man who believes that results accomplished in
one industry cannot be expected in another merely
because it is different. The scientific man knows that,
if a single element in any situation is changed, the
entire condition is altered and what was apparently
impossible then becomes possible.”
It is this scientific objective attitude of dealing with
        <pb n="181" />
        156 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

business problems, of fitting men and machines together
 in the best possible ways, and of codrdinating
sales and financing with the programs of production,
that is revolutionizing the economies of business and
rapidly enhancing the values of business securities.
Under the influence of the industrial managers,
modern industry saves much waste. This is a basic
reason for the long bull market of 1922-1929.
        <pb n="182" />
        CHAPTER X

LABOR’S COOPERATIVE POLICY

ANYTHING which increases the nation’s productivity
 will tend to be reflected in a bull market.
A reason for rising stock prices closely associated
with the growth of management engineering, discussed
 in the last chapter, is that of the new policy
of the labor unions. This new policy is increasingly
sympathetic with management and has largely renounced
 the policy of limitation of output. Therefore
 it has contributed to increasing production,
which is reflected, among other ways, in increased
dividend earnings of common stock. The record of
greatly reduced strikes and labor disputes during the
years since 1922 speaks eloquently of one powerful
factor of the long rise of the stock price level.
In his address on “Modern Trade Unionism” before
 the Harvard Union (published by the American
Federation of Labor. Washington, D. C., 1925)
William Green, President of the American Federation
 of Labor, said:
“The Trade Union movement has been passing
through that period when physical controversies and
the tactics of force were most effective; it is now in a
period when its leaders must seek the conference
187
        <pb n="183" />
        158 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

room, and there by exposition and demonstration,
convince conferees of the justice and wisdom of
labor’s position. In such service labor is finding a
special need for trained representatives and effective
information.
“The new idea of joint responsibility in approaching
 the solution of industrial problems on the part of
the employer, management and employees is being
tried in various lines of industry. As a result of
the shopmen’s strike in 1922, the management and
employees of the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio Railroad have
been working together in a constructive way and
with what seems to be most successful results.”
The increasing rapprochement between Capital
and Labor meant increased real wages, increased real
income, increased profits. The modern position of
Labor was described by President Green in his address,
 “Labor’s Ideals Concerning Management”
(Bulletin, The Taylor Society, December, 1925), as
follows:
“Labor realizes that the success of management
means the success of Labor.
“Far that reason Labor is willing to make its contribution
 to assist management and to bring about
the right solution of problems dealt with by management.
 . . . The workers believe that through understanding
 and codperation the best interests of all
those associated with industry can be served . . .
through such understanding all the associated productive
 powers of industry can be mobilized into an
sconomic, sustained, impelling force through which
        <pb n="184" />
        RELATIONSHIP of WEEKLY WAGE RATE, HOURS WORKED PER
WEEK, AND UNIT PRIME COST

230C

250

INDEX NUMBER (1914 = 100)

EEKL' WAGE RATE

20(

=
su
£9

15¢

INIT PRIME COS

OC

RB (

A
1914

YOURS PER WEE

1919 1920 192 1922 (923 1924 1925 1926

CHART 17.—While the weekly wage rate increased from 1921-1928, unit prime cost diminished, due to
the more economical use of materials and labor and increased efficiency in output.
        <pb n="185" />
        160 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
economy and production may be completely accomplished.
 Through the development of a codperative
 spirit and the establishment of a frank relationship
 the rewards of the efforts of all those associated
 with industry can be equitably distributed.
“The wisdom of such a policy will be made manifest
 in a high standard of workmanship, in increased
industrial earnings, in waste elimination, and in the
personal contact between management and workers
which is free from suspicion, antagonism and
hatred.”
Under the leadership of William Green, Labor
now boasts of trying to save waste, realizing that the
ultimate source of wages is productivity. “We will
rely on facts rather than on force,” President Green
announced at the annual convention of his organization
 in Los Angeles in 1927. This was in comment
on the report of the Federation's Executive Council
that “unless workers are to be put at a disadvantage
in maintaining and advancing wages, unions must
gather their own statistics and make their own interpretations
 of the statistics compiled by statistical
bureaus and employers.”
John P. Frey, a member of the Council, declared
that the Federation's principle that “wages of workmen
 must keep pace with their increasing power of
production, has given the world a new instrument
with which to measure wages.”
In these statements lies the kernel of labor's new
policy of fact-finding in furtherance of its battle for
higher wages and increased purchasing power. Pro-
        <pb n="186" />
        Labor’s Codperative Policy 151
duction per worker increases with the advance in the
arts.

Index Number Instruments of New Policy
[ndex numbers must be the tools of this new policy,
as enunciated by union labor. They constitute
labor’s scorecard.
It was by index numbers that Professor E. E. Day
and Woodlief Thomas, of the Federal Reserve
Board's statistical division, found that from 1889
to 1925 the volume of physical production of manufactured
 goods in this country increased by 178 per
cent, while the relative number of wage earners
increased by only 87 per cent, and productivity per
worker rose about 49 per cent. The increase in
productivity has gained in speed so that the average
rate of increase from 1921 to 1925 was about 7 per
cent a year, as compared with but one-fourth of 1
per cent increase for the preceding twenty years. By
index numbers, again, the National Bureau of Economic
 Research finds an increase in real income of
27 per cent since 1919; and, as the real income of
the farming class has decreased, the industrial population
 has gained even more.
Largely through the incentives produced by watching
 these index numbers, as the scorecards of productivity,
 I have no doubt that the welfare of labor is
well on the way to be doubled. The substitution of
fact-finding for fault-finding, of common council for
conflict, coupled with better organization, more humane
 and enlightened management and greatly
        <pb n="187" />
        162 The Stock Market Crash—And After
increased use of machinery should utimately double
or triple the real wages and earnings of labor.
The tragedy of the past has been in the opposition
of so many misguided labor leaders, who have insisted
 on limitation of output and the quantities of
goods available for wages and profit. The “make
work” policy of labor, just as the monopolistic restrictions
 of employers seeking to extort higher
prices, had kept wages lower than they would otherwise
 be.

Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio Plan
The success of the plan of codperation between
management and men on the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio
Railroad, backed by organized labor, is particularly
noted in Recent Economic Changes as typical of the
increased “tempo” of activities during the past seven
years. When at the centenary of this railroad in the
fall of 1927, it ran its “Tom Thumb” locomotive, a
reproduction of the first one built in America, this
observance had a special meaning for American organized
 labor. It meant that at the close of its first
century, the employees of the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio
Railroad had helped contribute to organized American
 Industrialism an invention of superior efficiency,
quite as significant as that of the steam locomotive.
Daniel Willard, president of the road, testified at
a meeting of the American Civic Federation to the
value of this plan, stating that it was “useless for
the road to spend $250,000,000 on improvements
        <pb n="188" />
        Labor's Codperative Policy 163

and fail to get the co6peration of its men in getting
the most out of the improvements.”
Otto S. Beyer, Jr., consulting engineer for the
unions in the conduct of this experiment, has given
these figures to show how the so-called “B &amp;amp; O Plan”
of employee relationship worked out for better railroading:

“Up to the Fall of 1928, on this road, employees
had offered 21,900 suggestions for betterment. Of
these, 18,551 were adopted and are in practice. Of
the remaining number, 1,145 were still under consideration.

“Some 326 suggestions were classified to see who
benefits from them. Of this number, 168, or 51.5
per cent, were of primary benefit to management, 51,
or 15.7 per cent, were of primary benefit to employees,
 while 107, or 32.8 per cent, were of equal
benefit to both employer and employee.”
Charles I. Neill, formerly United States Commissioner
 of Labor, says that the spirit of the plan is
as vital and as “revolutionary as the spirit underlying
 the League of Nations.”
President Green has said that “no development in
industrial relations has attracted greater attention,
here or abroad, than union-management codperation
initiated on the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio Railroad.” In
March of 1923 the agreement went into effect. It is
now in force not only in the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio shops,
but in those of the Canadian National Railways,
Chicago &amp;amp; Northwestern, and of the Chicago, Mil-
        <pb n="189" />
        164 The Stock Market Crash—And After
waukee &amp;amp; St. Paul, as well as the Grand Trunk
Western.
Mr. Willard has said that the only real change in
men and management, since the initiation of the plan
by the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio employees, was ‘above the
ears.” Mor. Beyer, acting in behalf of the workers,
states these as the main principles of the new policy:
“(a) Full and cordial recognition of the federated
 shopmen’s unions as the agent of the employees.

“(b) Conceding to these unions and their spokesmen
 constructive as well as protective functions in
railroad management.
“(c) Agreement between these unions and management
 to cooperate for improved service to the
public.
“(d) Agreement to share fairly any consequent
benefits.
“(e) Projection of definite administration machinery
 to accomplish these purposes.”
The benefits of the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio experience
 have undoubtedly contributed to the economies
that are being reflected in the higher standards of
living enjoyed by this nation. A like satisfying of
fundamental human instincts is noted in the report of
the Committee on Recent Economic Changes in the
contract signed between the Amalgamated Association
 of Street and Electric Railway Employees of
America and the Philadelphia Rapid Transit Railway,
 agreeing to share in management and ownership
 of the system.
        <pb n="190" />
        Labor's Codperative Policy 165
Rival unions defeated the attempt to secure unionmanagement
 codperation when this plan was first
broached for Philadelphia in 1911. Without discriminating
 against union men, however, the plan
worked in that city for sixteen years prior to the
recent two-thirds vote by the union that made it a
plan for organized labor.
Like the somewhat different sort of management
of the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio Railroad in the case of its
shopmen, the so-called “Mitten Management” plan
justifies its cooperative agreement with organized
labor on two grounds: first, organization is needed to
protect the rights of labor; and second, labor organized
 for economic efficiency has the greatest power
for public and private good.
Both systems freely provide union representation
in management, and agreement to share fairly any
consequent benefits.

European Labor Dogma Reversed
Bettered industrial relations are mentioned by the
visiting European delegations investigating American
 industries as one explanation of the growth in
our prosperity. Here the workmen have awakened
to the fact that improved methods of production are
of benefit to themselves as well as to the owner and
the public. In the new labor compacts and in the
union banks, laborers have become capitalists. This
is contrary to the European industrial dogma, but it
seems to be winning, because it is based on sound
human psychology and philosophy.
        <pb n="191" />
        166 The Stock Market Crash—And After

By coéperation in production, human instincts are
satisfied. The instincts or impulses of ownership,
loyalty and responsibility are felt by the workers in
any enterprise in which they have a voice in the
hiring and firing of workers, the distribution and
routing of work, the steadiness of employment, the
hours of labor, holidays, the rates of wages and earnings,
 health and safety conditions.
The creative instinct is satisfied when the worker
is encouraged to use his brains, not only to suggest
the best way of doing his job, but to suggest improved
types of products and ways of cutting down labortime
 and other costs. Further, the creative instinct
is satisfied when the laborer is given appropriate
recognition for a good job well done. Devotion and
dependability deserve reward as well as ability and
skill.
These primitive instincts can be guided but not
suppressed. If employers would have their men
loyal, efficient, and contented, they must realize—
and they are realizing with increasing clearness—
that men must have the opportunity to give expression
 to the best that is in them. For without selfexpression
 and initiative, no man can lead a normal
life and give good service.

Reduction of Strikes in New Era

As already mentioned, the changed spirit in the
relations of Capital and Labor is manifest by the
reduction of industrial disputes. “Measured by any
standard,” President Hoover's Committee on
        <pb n="192" />
        INDUSTRIAL DISPUTES anp WORKERS INVOLVED

2
0

do

3

300C

i
1
n

280(

LEGEND:

NUMBER OF DISPUTES
= WORKERS INVOLVED

300

S00

000

200

wn

mo

&amp;amp;

3

3

8

N
»

g

2

3

3

o

1
a

CuarT 18.—New policy of cobperation between labor and employers is reflected
remarkably in the sharp decline in number of industrial disputes and of workers
involved since 1922.
        <pb n="193" />
        168 The Stock Market Crash—And After
Recent Economic Changes says (page 490), ‘the
period since 1922 has been remarkably free of upheavals
 in industrial relations.” The committee
finds from the records of the United States Bureau
of Labor Statistics a ‘‘sharp decline” since 1922
“over the preceding years from 1916 to 1921.” In
the period 1916-1921, there were 3,503 disputes involving
 1,789,301 employees per year; in the period
1922-1926, there were but 1,164 disputes involving
only 688,538 employees per year. This is despite
the fact that 1922, which is included in the period
of fewer disputes, was one of large strikes and more
properly belongs in the earlier period. President
Hoover's committee remarks:
“The comparative quiet of those last years is all
the more marked in contrast to the state of affairs
before 1923, when there took place some of the
largest and longest strikes in the history of the
country. In 1919, more than 1,000,000 workers
were involved in strikes in the coal fields and railroad
 industry; disputes in the building trades of
Chicago and New York resulted in a strike of 250,-000;
 100,000 longshoremen along the Atlantic coast
stopped work; a strike in the stockyards of Chicago
brought out 65,000 strikers; and strikes in the clothing
 and textile industries several hundred thousands
more. Altogether, the reports to the United States
Bureau of Labor Statistics indicate more than 4,000,-000
 persons involved in industrial disputes in 1919.
The following years were quieter but by no means
free of strikes. In 1920, there were the large ‘out-
        <pb n="194" />
        Labor's Codperative Policy 169
law’ strikes of railway switchmen and yardmen and
the strike of the anthracite miners; in the year following,
 a strike of the marine workers in all principal
ports and conflicts in the clothing, building and packing
 industry; and in 1922, when the number of reported
 strikers rose to 1,600,000, there took place
the great strikes of the coal miners and of the railroad
 shopmen.”
So in the very years of the long bull market, a new
era of comparatively peaceful relations between
Capital and Labor helped the average of stock
prices to achieve its new plateau.

Human Engineering
Along with these more peaceful relations have
come feats of “human engineering” which have cut
sick days among the workers, and shown that periodical
 physical examinations pay dividends to owners
and health to workers. Employers and employees
alike profit by mutual benefit arrangements adopted
by the big corporations. Group insurance made possible
 by employers contributing dollar for dollar with
the employed has helped reduce the national sick
bill and increased general prosperity.
Harold A. Ley, President of the Life Extension
Institute, reports a reduction of eighteen per cent
in mortality in a group of policyholders taking a
health service, now standardized under a mutual
benefit plan that has been adopted by many great
corporations.
A study by Doctor A. H. Ryan, of Tufts College,
        <pb n="195" />
        170 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

of 600 industrial workers taking periodic health
examinations through a series of years, shows that
by the time of the third annual examination there
was a reduction by sixty-one per cent in the initial
disabilities of the group.
Employers are finding today that their profits
depend upon the productivity of their employees,
and this, in turn, depends on the health and attitude
of employees toward their employers.

Group Insurance
Group insurance is the means by which health
care in industry is being rapidly extended. This
plan has grown amazingly since its beginning in
1914, until by the middle of 1928, some $7,800,000,~
000 of such insurance, covering 6,500,000 workers,
was being carried by nearly 25,000 employers in all
lines of industry. Some notion of the savings effected
through such group insurance, together with the
sickness prevention method it entails, is given by
Doctor Quinby, of the Hood Rubber Company, who
shows that in twelve plants which lack the health
service, the cases of sickness and non-industrial accidents
 causing absences of over two days were 523
per thousand, against 342 per thousand in his own
plant, which included the health service. Doctor
Quinby’s testimony is especially competent, because
it is backed by six years of well-organized work in
sickness prevention.
Owen D. Young, Chairman of the General Elec-
        <pb n="196" />
        Labor's Cooperative Policy 171

tric Company, remarked at the convocation of New
York University in 1928 that there “seems to be
periods in the world’s history when the imagination
of man flowers into production; curiously enough, it
always has a relation to business and profits.” Thanks
to health research and improved hygienic practices,
Mr. Young said, plagues are today unknown that in
past years wiped out in a single season a sixth to a
quarter of London's population. The time of such
ravages from disease is past. Periodic health examinations
 among groups of workers are a powerful
instrument for accelerating this process.
Doctor James E. Kavanagh, Vice President of the
Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, speaking at
the convention of the Association of Life Insurance
Presidents in 1928, said that group insurance is a
leaven working through the nation’s industry to effect
“greater codperation between employer and employee,
 reduction of labor turnover, increased protection
 of employees against death, sickness, accident
and old age; increased thrift and increased effort for
better health and working conditions. . . . It is
because of its economic advantages that group insurance
 has spread so rapidly in America. The
insurance companies have, in effect, applied the principles
 of production engineering to merchandizing
their goods. Labor profits from good management
which considers the welfare of the employee and results
 in steady employment of wages of high purchasing
 power.”
        <pb n="197" />
        172 The Stock Market Crash—And After

Summary

To sum up: during the past half-dozen years we
have come definitely into an age of greater codperation
 between Capital and Labor, with the rapid
growth of plans whereby Labor shares in management,
 increased efficiency and enhanced health
through increased wages and participation in group
insurance. It is generally recognized by employers
that a very slight decrease in the death rate will save
scores of thousands of valuable lives. Under several
 plans medical examinations and health supervision
 are furnished to the workers at costs that are
shared equally between employers and employees.
This bettered relation between Capital and Labor
has promoted productivity and so helped the long
bull market reach its new plateau.
Employers have modified their attitude and prejudices
 quite as much as have the workers. The more
progressive employers, like Henry S. Dennison, have
built up their businesses by means of the codperative
efforts of their employees. This spirit of liberalism
is spreading among industrial managers who have
heretofore stood for autocracy rather than democracy
 in industrial management,
Eugene G. Grace, President of the Bethlehem
Steel Company, in his 1928 letter on “Prosperity and
High Wages” recognizes the importance of this
codperative principle in creating prosperity through
maintaining the buying power of workers. Mr.
Grace says: “In the last ten vears a new order has
        <pb n="198" />
        Labor's Codperative Policy 173

been created in our economic life. It is recognized,
first, that high standards of living are based on the
greater earning power of labor, and, second, that
continued prosperity and high wages go hand in
hand.”
President Grace holds that one of the chief functions
 of progressive industrial management is to safeguard
 the wage rates and earnings of the workers.
“Even when profits decline or business falls off,” he
said, “efforts are made to economize in other ways
than by cutting wages.”
Only a few years ago wages were the first item
of expense to be cut when business declined. In
times of prosperity, also, wages and earnings were
watched carefully, and, if they mounted above what
was thought by the managers to be proper for
workers to receive, a new scale was established which
promptly brought them down to “normal.”
Today both workers and managers have come to
recognize that the end and aim of production is to
produce goods that will sell, and not be piled up in
warehouses and stores, and that high employee earnings
 per year may actually mean low labor cost per
piece, and, consequently, low prices, large sales, and
large profits.
Workers today, better than ever before, understand
 that wages must be in a fair and just relation
to production. Wages are far the largest item of
cost in the production of most goods. If wage rates
per piece are disproportionately high in any industry,
the total cost of production in that industry will be
        <pb n="199" />
        174 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
boosted to the injury of that industry and all related
industries.
American industry has reached its present state of
unprecedented efficiency and prosperity, and the
American stock market has reached a new and probably
 permanent level of higher prices of securities,
partly through the recognition, however dimly, of
the fact that, while workers and employers have differences
 of viewpoint and of interest, their aims are,
in the main, in harmony rather than in conflict.
        <pb n="200" />
        CHAPTER XI

THE DIVIDENDS OF PROHIBITION

ANOTHER basic reason for the new plateau of the
stock market is to be found in expectation of future
dividends because of prohibition. This is fully
elaborated in my book Prohibition Still at Its Worst.
Prohibition is a highly controversial subject, but
not on the economic side. Whatever else we may
think of prohibition, there is no gainsaying its economic
 value; although we may, of course, differ as to
how great its economic value is—whether it is over
six billion dollars a year, as I suggested in my book
Prohibition at Its Worst, or larger or smaller.

Estimates of Money Gains
Professor Feldman, who criticizes, and with some
justice, the method used in my estimate in his Economic
 Effects of Prohibition, finds prohibition has
become economically important, but he is unwilling
to make any estimate in figures. Professor Feldman
 showed that Herbert Hoover, as Secretary of
Commerce, had ascribed to prohibition an increase
of efficiency in the individual worker of upward of
10 per cent, stating in positive terms: “There is no
[7%
        <pb n="201" />
        176 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
question that prohibition is making America more
productive.”
Dr. Paul H. Nystrom, Professor of Marketing of
the School of Business in Columbia University, estimates
 $5,000,000,000 gained through prohibition,
simply by diverting production from a narcotic drug
to more legitimate goods. Addressing the National
Retail Dry Goods Association in New York City,
February 8, 1929, Dr. Nystrom said:
“Prohibition, with all its arguments pro and con,
undoubtedly is diverting not less than $5,000,000,000
a year, which would normally be expended on alcoholic
 drink were it not for prohibition, to other
classes of commodities and to savings. Place whatever
 estimate you like on the amount of bootleg
liquor sold in this country, and I am sure you will
admit, as I have been forced to admit, that a return
to the liquor consumption of the pre-Volstead days
would mean several billions of dollars less business
in home furnishings, automobiles, musical instruments,
 radio, travel, amusements, jewelry, insurance,
education, books and magazines.”

Testimony by Employers
Professor Feldman says:
“Taking into account, also, the concerns which
the writer visited, a majority of the total number replied
 that prohibition had aided individual productivity,
 while less than half a dozen concerns claimed
prohibition to have decreased productivity. This is
somewhat surprising, because many executives had
        <pb n="202" />
        The Dividends of Prohibition 177

much to say against the ruinous quality of available
liquor. Whatever the ill effects of such liquor may
be, there was practically no testimony that it had
tended to reduce productivity.”
An important detail of the economic gains resulting
 from prohibition is supplied in the testimony of
Joseph E. Gilbert, builder of many of New York's
tall structures, in a report of his address to the members
 of a building firm, published by the New York
Times, January 20, 1929. Mr. Gilbert is quoted:
“With the coming of prohibition, it was believed
in many quarters that the throwing of so many
saloon corners on the market would cause a sharp
decline in values, which would also have a bad effect
on other properties. Such, however, has not been
the case. We found that saloons were not the only
class of business desirous of obtaining corner locations
 and paying well for them. Today the value of
practically every corner formerly used for dispensing
liquor has increased from two to four times.”

No Economist Denies Gains

So much for the physiological testimony as to the
impairment produced by even moderate amounts of
alcohol affecting the efficiency of workmen. As for
the testimony of economists, Prohibition Commissioner
 Doran recently issued a statement that he had
failed to find any economist who would gainsay that
prohibition has been a vast help to welfare in the
United States. I can verify this testimony. I was
requested by the then President of the American
        <pb n="203" />
        178 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
Economic Association to convoke a “round table” on
this question at its annual meeting in St. Louis in
1927. It was desired that I have both sides represented,
 the wet and the dry; yet I could find not a
single economist in the United States who was willing
to take the wet side in this “round table.”
[ found many economists who were opposed to
prohibition on the ground of personal liberty, or
other grounds, but not one who was opposed to it on
economic grounds. The commission sent by the
British Government to the United States to examine
into the elements of American prosperity, reported
prohibition as one of the prime causes for the extraordinary
 gains in national efficiency and in real
income since the war.

Fallacy of Revenue Loss
Finally, there remains the contention of economic
loss on account of deprivation of governmental
revenues from excise taxes, levied upon the liquor
traffic before prohibition. Thus the Association
Against the Prohibition Amendment declares that
the “bill for prohibition exceeds the total revenue received
 by the Federal Treasury from individual income
 taxes, which in 1928 were $882,727,114.” The
pamphlet adds:
“The itemized bill which we have made up
from government figures on current expenses and
official reports of pre-prohibition finances, comes to
$9136,000,000.”
        <pb n="204" />
        The Dividends of Prohibition 179

By this argument the Association Against the Prohibition
 Amendment is appealing to the pocketbook
of income taxpayers. Its argument is for the restoration
 of a trafhc that is generally acknowledged to be
parasitic on all productive industry.
Of course, the argument is the other way around.
All income is dependent upon the productivity of
labor and capital. Anything which impairs that productivity
 will impair the national income. If the
“loss” in Federal revenues, which the Association
Against the Prohibition Amendment places at $936,-000,000
 a year, due to cutting off the former taxes
on the outlawed traffic, is to be considered at all, it
should be in connection with the economic gains.
But this “loss” is, as a matter of fact, not a loss
in any true sense. It is a primary economic fact that
removal of a tax, while it is a surrender of revenue to
the government in a particular direction, is not at all
a surrender of income of society. To the extent that
it is a “loss” to the public treasury, it is a gain, to
the same extent, to those who formerly paid the
tax.

A tax comes out of the individual pocket and goes
into the common pocket of the nation; so it does not
get us anywhere to talk about the “loss” sustained
by the government which surrenders a tax or shifts
the form in which it is applied. This argument is on
all fours with the ridiculous assumption of “loss”
recoverable by repealing the prohibition of sales of
narcotic drugs in placing that tariff under a license
        <pb n="205" />
        180 The dStock Market Crash—dAnd After
tax. The fact that it is a mischievous and parasitic
business is, of course, ignored. For every million
dollars recovered in taxes by restoring the saloon,
the nation would pay many millions directly to the
saloons, and many millions more in impaired
efficiency of its workers and in productive business
replaced by a destructive trafhc.
Moreover, in reply to this plea of loss of taxes, to
those who allege economic “loss,” Dr. J. M. Doran,
Commissioner of Prohibition, on June 15, 1929, met
them on their own grounds of government receipts
and expenditure. Dr. Doran said:
“During the nine years since the effective date of
prohibition the expenditures for the Prohibition
Bureau, Coast Guard and Customs, incident to the
enforcement of the eighteenth amendment, total
$141,179,485. The collections from fines and penalties
 and the revenue from taxes on distilled spirits
and fermented liquors total $460,502,792.76.
“It is apparent that the collections by far overbalance
 the expenditures. Even if $72,000,000 estimated
 in the pamphlet as the cost to the Department
of Justice for the enforcement of prohibition should
be added, there would still be a balance of $247,-324,307.76
 over and above the total expenditures
accredited to the enforcement of the orohibition
law.”

Dr. Doran further disputed the accuracy of the
$936,000,000 estimate. But from whatever point of
view, the argument to the pocketbook of the income
taxpaver is not justified.
        <pb n="206" />
        The Dividends of Prohibition

[87

Net Saving in Distributed Wealth

Even if the expenditure for illegal beverages be as
great as certain estimates make it out to be, it is
largely the expenditure of the rich. At $2.50 a pint
for whiskey, the poor, who mainly paid the former
revenue of the saloon, can no longer afford to buy it.
Economists agree that, except in cases where the distribution
 of income is the same, a comparison of
expenditures, dollar for dollar, in two different social
strata is illusory, because ten dollars means to a rich
man less than one dollar to a. poor man. It would
be fairer to compare the present consumption with
pre-prohibition consumption, not on a dollar basis,
but on a quantity basis, and if, as in my opinion seems
to be indicated, alcoholic consumption has been reduced
 through prohibition to 10 or 15 per cent of
what it was, the net saving in distributed wealth is
great.

Thus prohibition, with all its shortcomings, has
probably had a part in raising the national income
during the last few years, and so raising the earnings
and prices of stocks.
        <pb n="207" />
        CHAPTER XII

RELIEF IN SEVEN YEARS OF STABLE MONEY

A major reason why expected earnings of corporations
 should now bulk larger than they did a
few years ago, as reflected in the high price levels of
stocks, is that since 1922 the United States has had a
comparatively stable level of commodity prices, that
is, a stable dollar.
We have had seven years of stable purchasing
power, such as has never existed before in this country.
 The influence of this factor, while potent, is
subtle and generally overlooked. Through what I
have called the “money illusion,” the business man
generally does not know when the dollar does change,
much less does he realize when the dollar does not
change. But the harm from the change and the good
from the lack of change are very real and powerful.
Like the influence of peace as distinct from war, any
stability of commodity prices which makes the calculation
 of the business man, in terms of dollars and
cents, more safe than when the purchasing power of
the dollar is constantly changing, results in prosperous
 conditions, bigger earnings, better prospects, and
a higher price level of securities.

Qs
        <pb n="208" />
        ea

Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 183

The “Money Illusion”

In my book The Money Illusion 1 have fully
described why it is that we simply take it for granted
that “a dollar is a dollar’ —that “a franc is a franc,”
and that all money is stable, just as centuries ago, before
 Copernicus, people took it for granted that this
earth was stationary, that there was really such a fact
as a sunrise or a sunset, although we know that sunrise
 and sunset are illusions produced by the earth
rotating around its axis. The reason for the “money
illusion” within one’s own country. is described in the
first chapter of this book, as follows:
“Almost everyone is subject to the ‘Money Illusion’
 in respect to his own country’s currency. This
seems to him to be stationary while the money of
other countries seems to change. It may seem
strange, but it is true, that we see the rise or fall
of foreign money better than we see that of our
own.

“For instance, after the war, we in America knew
that the German mark had fallen, but very few Germans
 knew it. This was certainly true up to 1922,
when, with another economist (Professor Frederick
W. Roman), I studied price changes in Europe. On
my way to Germany I stopped in London and consulted
 with Lord D’Abernon, then British Ambassador
 to Germany. He said: ‘Professor Fisher, you
will find that very few Germans think of the mark
as having fallen. I said: ‘That seems incredible.
Every schoolboy in the United States knows it." But
        <pb n="209" />
        184 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

I found he was right. Germans thought of commodities
 as rising and thought of the American gold
dollar as rising. They thought we had somehow cornered
 the gold of the world and were charging an
outrageous price for it. But to them the mark was
all the time the same mark. They lived and breathed
and had their being in an atmosphere of marks, just
as we in America live and breathe and have our being
in an atmosphere of dollars. Professor Roman and
I talked at length with twenty-four men and women
whom we met by chance in our travels in Germany.
Among these only one had any idea that the mark
had changed.
“Of course, all the others knew that prices had
risen, but it never occurred to them that this rise
had anything to do with the mark. They tried to
explain it by the ‘supply and demand’ of other goods;
by the blockade; by the destruction wrought by the
war; by the American hoard of gold; by all manner
of other things—exactly as in America, when, a
few years ago, we ourselves talked about the ‘high
cost of living,” we seldom heard anybody say that
a change in the dollar had anything to do with it.”

Gyrations of the Dollar
But Germans and Americans alike kept their ac
counts in what was, in reality, a fluctuating unit, in
one case the mark and in the other the dollar.
The dollar, reckoned as a yardstick of goods
values, shrinks and expands. Doctor E. W. Kemmerer.
 who was an expert adviser to the Dawes
        <pb n="210" />
        Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 185

Commission and has just concluded a study of the
finances of China for its government, emphasizes this
unstable quality of purchasing power of currency
units in all his reports as financial adviser to a dozen
European, South American, and African nations.
Dr. Kemmerer recently said:
“The gyrations in the value of the gold dollar since
the end of the last century have been fully as violent
 as during any equal periods in the history of
our country. Between 1900 and the beginning of
the World War, the purchasing power of the dollar
fell 18 per cent. From 1914 to 1920, it fell §7
per cent, or, from 1896 to 1920, over 70 per cent.
From the middle of 1920 to September, 1928, the
purchasing power of the dollar rose 56 per cent, but
it is still 44 per cent less than in 1896. It is to this
unsteady monetary unit that our financial and economic
 systems are tied.”
Professor Kemmerer goes on to show that innumerable
 contracts, which are promises to pay a
given number of dollars at future dates—go days,
six months, or in terms of years—divide the nation
into debtors and creditors. A depreciating dollar,
one that buys constantly less goods, robs the creditors
 and the wage-earning and salaried classes for
the advantage of the debtors. An appreciating dollar
 robs the debtors for the advantage of the creditors.
 Dr. W. I. King has estimated that this wholesale
 robbery took place in a period of five years in
the United States to the extent of $40,000,000,000.
But since 1922, thanks to measures of control
        <pb n="211" />
        186 The Stock Market Crash—And After
already taken by the Federal Reserve Board, the
upward and downward fluctuations in purchasing
power of the dollar have been less observable than
during any equal period since 1800. There has been
a slight tendency to increase in the purchasing power
of the dollar. as reflected in a lower wholesale price

WHOLESALE COMMODITY PRICES [RVING FISHERS STABILITY

20
17
18¢
12:

162.

3

'S

1828

18926

1927

1928

ga
1929

CHART 19.—Stable wholesale commodity price level, 1923-1929,
(steadied purchasing power of the dollar) has encouraged the making
 and keeping of business contracts.

level since 1925; but this was brought about mainly
through reduction in costs by mass production and
skilled organization. While the dollar increased in
purchasing power during 1926, part of 1927 and
during the latter half of 1929, there was slight evidence
 of deflation that would be shown in the general
shutting down of plants and unemployment. That
        <pb n="212" />
        Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 187
is because the people could not only buy goods with
a dollar, but because they had more dollars in
their income.
We do not often have such an expansion of commodities
 at reduced prices as has been recorded during
 the past few years. This expansion has taken
place in the greatest burst of speed American industry
 ever attained. But the reduction in prices was
warranted, for the most part, by an equal or greater
reduction in unit costs. Had there been a reduction
in prices such as that from May, 1920, to June, 1921,
when the dollar rose rapidly in buying power, from
40 to 70 pre-war cents, there would have been no
such expansion of American industry as the last six
or seven years have witnessed, but a repetition of the
collapse of industry that took place in the 1920-1921
period.
For when prices fell in the summer of 1920 below
the level of cost, profits ceased and losses were incurred,
 factories shut down, workers were turned
away by hundreds of thousands, continued purchasing
 power was reduced and “hard times” came on.
Such were the evils of deflation.
The evil of inflating the currency is about as great
as the evil of deflating it. A workingman who, in
1896, had put $100 into a savings bank found, in
1920, that his principal, plus compound interest at
41% per cent, amounted to about $300. On the face
of it he had his principal back and in addition $200
of profit, or accumulated interest. This $200 seemed
a genuine reward of thrift. But it was an illusory
        <pb n="213" />
        188 The Stock Market Crash—And After
profit, due to a sort of bogus accounting in terms of
a varying dollar.
For when this depositor came to spend his $300
in 1920, he found prices nearly four times as high
as they had been in 1896. Hence, his entire accumulation
 of $300 would buy only about three-quarters
 as much as his original $100 would buy in 1896.

Federal Reserve Control of Price Level
It was doubtless partly to avoid these upward and
downward fluctuations in the value of the purchasing
power of the dollar that the Federal Reserve Board
has tried to influence the expansion and contraction
of the currency on behalf of the nation’s business.
Thus in 1922, when the war and efforts at reconstruction
 had occasioned the flow to America of huge
gold reserves that threatened inflation, officials of
the Federal Reserve Board realized that all possible
steps should be taken to prevent it. Had they not
taken such action, but encouraged the banks to continue
 to follow blindly the profit motive, they would
have loaned and reloaned their gold reserves until
the credit structure had been doubled. Then the
reserve ratio, instead of being, as it was in the fall
of 1929, about 70 per cent, would, under the profit
motive, have sunk more nearly to the legal ratios—
35 per cent for deposit liabilities and 40 per cent
for Federal Reserve notes.
This doubled credit structure would probably have
led to a doubled price level. There would have been
consequent inflation quite comparable to the inflation
        <pb n="214" />
        Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 18g

of 1917-1920, and it might have had as disastrous
an end. Such a let-alone policy would not have safeguarded
 the dollar, but would have depreciated it,
in spite of its fixed weight.

Method of Discount and Open Market Control
So in 1922 the Federal Reserve System set up its
Open Market Committee to buy and sell securities,

i"

20

10)

z
100
8

“EDERAL RESERVE CREDIT CONTROL.

00 2. 5 FeuiartE

pe

-

i
“sien

hE ee
TRAER TT PRR

Ri
EMBER]

NOUS] AL
RODUCTIOM

egy
SET
pa

I

3

y

10

1922

1923

i924

i928

1826

ae iE
1927 1928 1329

Cuarrt 20~—Influence on industrial output through regulation of
the rediscount rate and open market operations. These have been
so used as to tend to keep the price level and business steady.

especially government bonds, for the purpose of influencing
 the credit situation. This committee was
reorganized in 1923 “with primary regard to the
accommodation of commerce and business, and to
        <pb n="215" />
        190 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

the effect of such purchases or sales on the general
credit situation.” This power, rightly used, makes
the Federal Reserve System the greatest public service
 institution in the world.
When the system buys securities it thereby puts
money into circulation. When it lowers the Federal
 Reserve discount rate, it makes loans contracted
by the member banks much easier to carry. The
people have more money and credit. When the system
 spells, it thereby withdraws money or credit from
circulation and when the rediscount rate is raised it
makes loans to the member banks by the Federal
Reserve Banks harder to get. Thus by this policy
of expansion of credit or contraction of credit, respectively,
 as deflation or inflation of the commodity
price level may be threatened, the Federal Reserve
System exercises a strong regulative policy over the
purchasing power of the dollar. This policy has
prevailed during the past seven years to make the
purchasing power of the dollar stable. Thus the
Federal Reserve System wields a powerful control
over loans, prices and prosperity.

Adviser to Banks and Business
Moreover, during the year preceding the stock
market crash, the Federal Reserve Board, uneasy
because of the unusual flow of credits into the stock
market in the form of brokers’ loans, although I
have criticized its failure to take sufficiently aggressive
 action, nevertheless, acted as an agency of warning
 to the public and to the banks. In a radio
        <pb n="216" />
        Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 191

address broadcast on December 7, 1929, Lewis E.
Pierson, formerly President of the United States
Chamber of Commerce, said:
“Quite apart from its control over currency and
credit, the Reserve System has been a tower of
strength to American finance through its advisory
assistance to the banker in his individual problem.
“While I am on the topic of the Reserve Board,
let me say—and I have no hesitation in saying—
that had it not been for the warning issued by the
Board as long ago as last March, the recent stock
panic would have been infinitely worse. Bear in
mind that as a result of the stock crash loans amounting
 to $1,750,000,000 were liquidated almost overnight.
 If our financial institutions had not been in
an impregnable position, this forced liquidation
would have strewn the country with bank failures.
What the country experienced in the dark days a
month ago was but a zephyr to the whirlwind that
would have struck us but for the advance warning
of the Reserve Board. Our banks are sounder and
stronger than ever before.”

Menace of Gold Shortage
It is by no means certain that the seven years of
stable money will be followed by ‘equally stable conditions
 in future. On the contrary, there is now a
threat of deflation which cannot be overlooked!
The chief reason we have been able to stabilize money
for seven years has been in our surplus gold reserve,
constituting a slack which would be taken in or given
        <pb n="217" />
        192 The Stock Market Crash—And After

out, as required. But now we are confronted with
the disappearance of this surplus, both through the
growth of business and the falling off of gold
production.
It is true that there is the menace of a world
gold shortage which should become manifest during
the early years of the present decade, with accompanying
 deflation of the general price level and
business depression, unless measures are taken to
economize the gold supply. There is still enough
gold as the basis of money and credit to supply the
expanding needs of business for a year or two to
comé. And with proper measures of prevention,
the threatened long-term business depression, now
comparatively distant, may be averted.
But many economists and business men agree that
the world decline in commodity prices, only slightly
observable in the United States during the past five
years, is the beginning of a great secular downward
movement in prices spelling depression similar to
the movements following the Napoleonic wars and
the Civil War. The decline after our Civil War
persisted until 1897. Then the discovery of new
gold fields and the application of new methods of
gold extraction increased the gold output, thus increasing
 the supply of monetary gold and giving the
price level and upward swing. Gold production has
increased since the World War, but has not reached
the peak of 1915. Present yearly additions to the
gold monetary supply are insufficient to meet the
added demands for gold from increased business as
        <pb n="218" />
        WHOLESALE COMMODITY PRICE MOVEMENTS 1801 TO DATE

75
150
2%

1926 AV.= 00

175
150
125

00

OL

9
~

“

1am,

8

50

Se em mee + xe = = —_—— re Jas
800 BIO 1820 1830 1840 850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930
CHART 21.—After the Napoleonic wars, 1814-1860, and after the Civil War, 1864-1896, dearth of
monetary metals and lack of credit machinery for control of the commodity price level resulted in long-~ontinued
 deflation of prices and “hard times.”
        <pb n="219" />
        194 The Stock Market Crash—And After
the basis of the money and credit structures throughout
 the world.
With the yearly increase in gold production
lagging further and further behind the monetary demand
 from increased business, we may expect the
very elements of our prosperity making for business
expansion to accentuate this possible gold crisis in
the years to come with consequent business depression—unless
 measures which are quite practicable
shall be taken to prevent it.
But whatever the future may have in store, certain
it is that we have had seven wonderful years of
stable money.

Relief Due to Stable Money
Unlike the other five causes of increased national
productivity enumerated in preceding chapters,
namely, mergers, scientific research and invention,
management engineering, labor’s new policy, and
prohibition, the influence of stable money has been
purely negative, consisting as it has in the mere removal
 of the twin interferences of inflation and
deflation.
But these interferences, until the last few years,
have been so incessant and so ruinous—the last interference
 being the deflation of 1920-1921, still well
remembered—that the relief afforded by their removal
 must be regarded as of quite enormous importance.
 This negative cause, together with the five
more positive causes, constitute an adequate explanation
 for the amazing increase in productivity per
        <pb n="220" />
        Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 195
worker which we find has actually occurred. They
also account for the suddenness of this increase, and
its rapid rate. The leap upward in productivity
began even in the depression year 1921, and behind
some of our six causes by two or three years.
This was no more than to be expected. The unparalleled
 advance in “tempo” of production and
trade was synchronous with the other causes. The
organized advance of scientific research and invention
 and in management engineering grew out of the
war; it began about 1918-1920, and was followed by
the change in labor policy which became official
when William Green succeeded the late Samuel Gompers
 as President of the American Federation of
Labor in 1924. The bewildering multiplication of
mergers began after the war, and increased with the
advent of President Coolidge in 1923. National
prohibition took effect in 1920, and the open market
committee of the Federal Reserve Board began to
function in 1922 in a way to stabilize the general
level of wholesale prices.
Here are six causes, each powerful in itself, and
all beginning at or just before the great increase in
the rate of productivity, and so of corporate earnings,
 which has been so marked during the present
decade. The prime factor making for prosperity
from 1922 to 1927, inclusive, is thus defined by the
Report on Recent Economic Changes (page 862):
“The old process of putting science into industry
has been followed more intensively than before; it
has been supplemented by tentative efforts to put
        <pb n="221" />
        196 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
science into business management, trade union policy,
and government administration. Concrete instances
of technical improvements in many mining, metallurgical,
 and fabricating processes are given in the chapters
 on industry. The remarkable results achieved
are demonstrated statistically from census data showing
 output per worker. Similar, though less striking,
 instances appear in the chapter on construction.
Without help from any extraordinary invention, the
railroads, also, have attained a higher level of operating
 efficiency. In farming there is an intriguing
report of new machines and new methods coming
into use. Here, too, the record of average output
per worker shows considerable gain.
“All this means that since 1921 Americans have
found ways of producing more physical goods per
hour of labor than ever before. They have received
larger average incomes because they have produced
more commodities and services.”
It was in this intensified upthrust of forces making
 for increased productivity per worker during the
past seven years that the secret of the long bull market
 stands revealed. From this increased productivity
 came a more rapid increase of earnings of
corporations, together with the ‘“‘plowing-back” of
earnings in expectation of greater future gains. This
expectation made men content to invest their money
for smaller immediate dividends and at higher prices
for corporate securities than past earnings had
warranted.
A further reason was in the reduction of risks due
        <pb n="222" />
        Relief in Seven Years of Stable Money 197

to the rise of investment counsel and investment
trusts, consequent upon the new teaching that there
was a speculative element in investment in preferred
securities with fixed returns, because of fluctuation in
the purchasing power of the dollar, and greater
residual gains to be expected from the equities of
common shares. This phase of the investment market
 will be discussed in the next chapter.
        <pb n="223" />
        CHAPTER XIII

FLIGHT FROM BONDS TO STOCKS

A potent reason for the long bull market rising
to the plateau of stock prices of 1923-1930, is that
there has been a material change during this period
in the estimate of the public as to the risk of invest
ing in common stocks. Whether this change is
justified or not, the change has occurred. Only a
few years ago a bond was regarded as far safer than
a stock; a stock, in other words, as far unsafer than
a bond.
Prior to 1923 most investors thought that bonds
were safe. They forgot that the dollar was not
safe, and that the fixed dollar return from bonds
might at any time shrink in purchasing power. In
Germany people had lost 9g per cent of their principal
 and interest on bonds through forgetting that
the mark was not safe under the influence of the
“money illusion.” I have analyzed this illusion in the
preceding chapter. In truth, the “safety” of bonds
proved during the war a delusion and a snare. It is
only since the tragic downfall of stocks in the crash
of 1929 that bonds again afford a contrast on the
side of safety.
Sometimes, when the dollar was steady, bonds
raf
        <pb n="224" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 199

have yielded a steady income. Sometimes, when
prices were falling, that is, when the dollar was rising,
 they have yielded an increasing income measured
 in purchasing power. Sometimes, when the
dollar was falling in purchasing power, they have
vielded a shrinking income and a shrunken principal

1400 |

NEW SECURITIES ISSUED gonds 10 erocr

300 )

200

10D

000

900]

800

L
~ - -
- NEW CAPITAL

. 700

8500

300

400

i
100 |

200

oc

ogi

{9

1920

1221

1922

1923

1924

1925

926

27

1epr 1929

CHART 22.—Large new security issues since 1924, have been
marked by a decided preference by the investing public for common
shares as against bonds.

in purchasing power. Yet this picking of the bondholder’s
 pocket was so subtle that he submitted to it
without a murmur; or, rather, he murmured only
against the high cost of living and not against the
insecurity of his investments or of the dollar. As a
        <pb n="225" />
        200 The Stock Market Crash—And After
matter of fact, the crucial element in all investments
is the value of the dollar.
Among several important books which emphasize
the important role of changes in the value of the
dollar, none has impressed the investing public so
profoundly as certain events that gave rise to investment
 counsel and investment trusts in America, including
 especially the publication of Edgar Lawrence
Smith's book, Common Stocks as Long-Term Investments
 (Macmillan). Another excellent book is
Kenneth Van Strum’s Investment and Purchasing
Power.

Stocks vs. Bonds
Mr. Smith made about a dozen comparisons to
show how the stockholder and bondholder actually
fared at different periods. In the various tests, several
 different methods of selection were used, but all
were calculated to favor bonds rather than stocks.
Otherwise the superiority in yield of stocks would
have been even more pronounced.
But even with the choice of securities favorable
to bonds and unfavorable to stocks rather than representative
 of both, in only one case does Mr. Smith
find an excess of advantage for bonds. This is Test
6, where Boston investors are supposed to have invested
 $10,000 in bonds in 1866, and, at the same
time, $10,000 in assorted stocks. When they compared
 notes twenty years later it was found that the
total income from stocks was $13,169, and that from
the bonds was $12,155, showing a slight excess in
        <pb n="226" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 201

favor of stocks, so far as this item of income is con
cerned. But if we count the increase in the capital
value of the securities, the advantage was reversed,
making a net advantage for bonds of $1,012.
This period was, as is well known, a period of rapidly
 falling prices, so that the bondholder, so far as
the element of change in the dollar is concerned,
was benefited thereby.
On the other hand, during periods of rising prices,
such as 1901-1922, the stockholder had a very decided
 advantage. Test 1, for instance, showed that
as between $10,000 invested in 1901 in stocks and
$10,000 invested at the same time in bonds, there
was a net advantage in favor of the stockholder, of
principal and income together, of $10,981.
In all these comparisons the advantages are reckoned
 in the actual dollars received, a reckoning which
is imperfect, first, because of the variability of the
dollar, and second, because of the unequal distribution
 in time of the returns from stocks and bonds.
Evidently the fairest comparison is to be made
by computing the rate of yield in the various investments,
 in the sense that this phrase is used in the
ordinary bond tables. In this way we find the real
yield as distinct from the nominal yield. The distinction
 is somewhat analogous to that between real and
nominal wages. The rate of yield on any investment
 is that rate of interest, which, if used for discounting
 the income and principal to be received,
would give an aggregate discounted value at the time
of purchase, equal to the purchase price. Thus the
        <pb n="227" />
        202 The Stock Market Crash—And After

rate realized on a five per cent bond, running twenty
years, purchased at par and redeemable at par, will
be five per cent. But if purchased at 110, the rate
realized will be 4.3 per cent. While if it is purchased
 at go, the rate is 5.9 per cent. The rate of
yield when the calculations are in terms of dollars
(uncorrected for variations in purchasing power)
differs from the rate calculated in the terms of dollars
 corrected to a uniform purchasing power, say
pre-war dollars.

Speculative Character of Bonds
If we apply this yield idea to the various tests
which Mr. Smith has made we find results as follows.
 We see, for instance, that the man who in
1866, under Test 6, invested in bonds and redeemed
or sold them in 1885, made 6.8 per cent on his
money, reckoning in actual dollars, while reckoning
in pre-wars, he made 11.7 per cent. Again, under
Test 1, 1901-1922, the bondholder nominally made
4 per cent, but really only 1.1 per cent.
This analysis indicates clearly enough that during
periods of marked fluctuations in the general price
level, bonds have a speculative character. The series
of writers on this subject have proved, statistically,
that bonds are not, as compared with well-selected
and diversified stocks, what they have been cracked
up to be; that they are especially deceptive during
rising prices, and that even when prices are falling
they are not usually superior to stocks.
These writings threw a bombshell into the invest-
        <pb n="228" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 203

ing world. They evolved five reasons for the now
proved fact that stocks are a better investment than
bonds: first, because the stockholder stands to win
as well as to lose; second, because modern dividend
policy is toward steadiness; third, because a portion
of the stockholders’ earnings is reinvested for him
and ultimately yields further dividends; fourth, because
 the unstable dollar tricks the bondholder, but
any effect on the stockholder is largely neutralized;
and fifth, because diversification can correct the
irregularities of the stockholder’s income but not
that of the bondholder.
This fifth reason is much emphasized by these
writers, especially by Edgar Smith and Kenneth Van
Strum. They show that whatever truth there is in
the “risk” carried by the stockholder as compared
with the bondholder, this risk can be partly neutralized
 by diversification. If one invests $10,000 in
ten different companies, putting $1,000 into each,
while he does run a real risk of losing all that he
has invested in some one or two of these companies,
this risk is mostly offset by the probability that some
other company will prosper exceedingly. Both
Smith and Van Strum show how this diversification
does neutralize the risk and correct the unsteadiness
of the stockholder’s income.
The bondholder, like the stockholder, may be said
to be “gambling.” In fact, he is more like the man
betting on “heads” or “tails.” The dollar will go
up or down for all bonds at once, and there is no
wav to iron out that gamble by diversification. The
        <pb n="229" />
        204 The Stock Market Crash—And After

only way to stabilize income from bonds is to buy
stocks as well, these also being diversified. The
truth is, there is no way to get the gamble out of life
altogether. Neither stocks nor bonds are really
“safe” as to purchasing power. But the individual
investor is at a great advantage when he pools his
earnings and savings of those of a multitude of
others in an investment trust, which with the aid of
expert counsel keeps it invested in well-selected diversified
 stocks and preferred securities.

Taking Risk from Speculation
A little reasoning permits of a startling corollary.
It is this: If we can, by sufficient diversification in
investments, get a greater certainty and thus run
less risks from our speculation, then the more unsafe
 the investments are, taken individually, the safer
they are taken collectively, to say nothing of profit
ableness, provided that the diversification is suffi
ciently increased.
This paradox is derived directly from exploiting
the old-fashioned fear of common stocks and the
consequent refusal to deal in them, except well below
 their “mathematical value.”
Now, the mathematical value of a prize at stake
is that prize multiplied by the chance of winning
it. If a man stakes a dollar on “heads” coming up,
the mathematical value of that chance is exactly fifty
cents, because there is exactly one chance in two
that “heads” will come up. If the prize at stake is
        <pb n="230" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 205
to be won only in case two successive “heads” come
up, there is one chance in four and the mathematical
value is twenty-five cents.
This is so-called “fair” gambling. Any price
above the mathematical value is unfair gambling,
and none but a real gambler will pay more than the
mathematical value, or even so much. The gamblers
at Monte Carlo do pay about three per cent more
than the mathematical value of their chances; but
only conscious gamblers, not investors, participate
in rouge et noir. In fact, a sound-minded investor
will pay less than the mathematical value for a chance
to gain money on a risk. That is, he will trim that
price by means of a “caution coefficient,” to use a
term which I employed in my book on The Nature
of Capital and Income.
This “caution coefficient” becomes, in practice,
greater and greater as the risk grows. If my chance
of getting a dollar is a certainty, there would be no
reduction on account of the caution factor. If itis
like the chance of betting on “heads” or “tails,” the
caution factor may trim the price of the chance down
from fifty cents, in mathematical value, to say, forty
cents for the chance to win the dollar. That is a
reduction on account of caution to 20 per cent. But
if one bets on two heads in succession, the reduction
on account of caution would be correspondingly
greater, so that instead of paying twenty-five cents,
the mathematical value, the investor might insist on
a reduction of more than 20 per cent to say, fifteen
        <pb n="231" />
        206 The Stock Market Crash—And After

cents. It is both normal and proper that the higher
the risk the cheaper the chance of winning can be
obtained, compared with its mathematical value.
Hence, the more risky the investment would be to
a lone individual playing the game, the safer it is,
if, by pooling in an investment trust with wide diversification
 in investment, the individual risk is thereby
absorbed. For as the risk grows it can be constantly
absorbed by corresponding increases in diversification.
 Thus the individual member of the trust may
gain more on the riskier investments, bought by the
trusts at much less than their mathematical value,
than if he played the market alone with less risky
investments, but bought at much nearer their
mathematical value.
So the investment trust has proved that speculation
 can be turned into investment which is much
safer than many individual investments in so-called
“gilt-edge’ securities. And the paradox is that because
 of the ‘‘caution factor” the market value of
the riskiest investments has been depressed far below
their real mathematical value. The investment
trusts, carrying the principle of diversification to wide
limits, have managed to get a higher average return
from investments which individually would have
proved quite risky, while at the same time they have
extracted from them largely their elements of risk.
This principle, so far as I know, never has been
definitely formulated in the investment market, but
it has been acted upon intuitively by increasing numbers
 of investors, who have accepted it by employ-
        <pb n="232" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 207

ing investment trusts, investment counsel and other
skilled means of diversifying the use of their funds.
Naturally this enlightened process has created a tremendous
 new market for securities that in times past
have gone begging. With the increased demand, the
price of these formerly despised securities has risen.
Thus the change in the caution factor, reducing it
to a much narrower margin from the true mathematical
 value of common stocks as their element of
risk have been absorbed by intelligent diversification,
has helped put the stock market on its higher plateau.
[t constitutes a permanent reason why this plateau
will not sink again to the level of former years except
for extraordinary causes.

Principle of Constant Scrutiny

This is more certain because of another principle
which may be added to that of diversification. It is
the principle of constant inspection or check-up as to
the status of companies issuing stocks, and constant
turnover accordingly. Of course, bonds require less
inspection than stocks; hence in times past when each
man was his own investor, the busy man or the lazy
man preferred bonds because he could put them in
his safe-deposit box and forget them, while investments
 in common stocks required unusual care and
attention in the turnover of his funds—more than
he was willing or able to give.
For the sound investor in common stocks must
turn them over constantly, selling those that are losing
 in value and investing in those that are gaining
        <pb n="233" />
        208 The Stock Market Crash—And After
This function is performed today by skilled investment
 counsel to a degree that makes investments in
common stocks, guarded by their vigilance, safer than
the former investment in bonds by individuals. The
old and the new points of view came into comical
contrast when investment counsel recently proffered
their services to a church committee in an eastern
state. They were solemnly assured that such services
 were “not at all necessary, because the late
Bishop, who died a few years ago, had himself personally
 passed upon all the investments before
his death and pronounced them first class and
sound!”
The church investments were largely in bonds.
But it is certain that those bonds, however good they
might have been in former years, were not so good
an investment as common stocks that are constantly
scrutinized by a modern, first-class investment trust.
Because of the scientific appraisals of the stock
market by the investment trusts and investment counselors,
 therefore, and the strides in research, invention,
 elimination of waste and increased productivity
due to the other factors described in this book that
have characterized the years since the war, what
was once speculation or mere gambling in common
stocks has changed toward safer investment. The
intrinsic value of stocks, present and future, has
increased.

Along with these influences for a higher market,
the commodity price level has been maintained in
relative stability since 1921, largely by the action of
        <pb n="234" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 209

the Federal Reserve System codperating with business
 in the control of credit. A dangerous surplus
of gold has been redistributed among the central
banks of the world in aid of the post-war resumption
of the gold standard. This has steadied the levels
of commodity prices in foreign countries and encouraged
 international trade. The comparative
stabilization of gold in terms of goods has given
reassurance to the bond market as well as to stock
investments. The investment trusts and counsel have
led investors to put their eggs in three baskets—
common stocks, preferred stocks, and bonds.
The high plateau on which the stock market now
moves—still far above previous plateaus, despite
the panic of 1929—is, therefore, a result of improved
 order and efficiency in the investment market
as well as in American business.

Post-Panic Increase of Shareholders
While the stock market was falling to its low level
during November, 1929—proving the tragic exception
 to the case for stocks as against investment in
bonds—many observers were surprised at the
increase of the number of shareholders reported
by several large corporations as a result of the
break. Of course, there was the taking up of
margin accounts for which the shares were previously
carried in brokers’ loans, and this explains in a
measure the increases in shareholders. But there
was an increase of more than fifty thousand shareholders
 of the Cities Service Company during that
        <pb n="235" />
        210 The Stock Market Crash—And After

month, who were added to the more than 250,000
shareholders already on the company’s books. General
 Motors, also, gained about 40,000 shareholders
 during the three months of record declines
in the market, representing an increase of more than
one-third, while the value of its shares fell by nearly
50 per cent.
Preliminary reports by other large corporations
led to the same conclusion, namely, that the break in
stock prices was not followed by a decline in the relative
 popularity of common stocks as investments.
These increases in shareholders helped confirm the
opinion during the sharp declines in brokers’ loans,
for example, while prices of stocks were increasing
during the week ended November 20th, that stocks
carried on margin were being transferred to buyers
who paid cash. In fact, the commercial banks reported
 a heavy stream of orders from customers
who were taking advantage of the decline to purchase
 stocks for cash. They had held back their
purchasing power until they saw their favorite issues
available, in many instances at the lowest level in
two years or more; then they came into the market
and bought after the reaction.
Such was the momentum of the movement of
preference for stocks as against bonds, which persisted
 after the long bull market since 1922. During
the bull market the flight to common stocks away
from bonds was shown by the increase in prices of
equity securities. Thus total value of long- and shortterm
 bonds issued during the first eight months of
        <pb n="236" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 211

1925 amounted to $2,353,000,000, while stock issues
 during that period amounted to only $804,000,-000,
 exceeding slightly one-third of the total loaned.
But during the first eight months of 1929, stock
issues amounted to $4,794,000,000 or more than
double the long- and short-term bond and note issues,
which were only $2,360,000,000.
Moreover, the bonds of 1929 had been affected
with equity interests in one form or another, such as
permission to convert into common stock, or to buy
common stock at future dates at a definite price;
also, in certain contracts, to receive interest payments
 in common stock if desired.

Stock Conversions of Funded Debt
Along with this preponderance of the issues of
equity securities during the two years 1928 and
1929, came announcements by leading corporations
that they would retire their redeemable funded debt
through new stock issues. United States Steel led
the way, followed by the Bethlehem Steel Corporation,
 which announced, during September of 1929,
its intention to take up about $90,000,000 longterm
 bonds callable at 105 to 107; while United
States Steel had announced its decision to cancel
$271,000,000 of long-term indebtedness redeemable
before maturity at 110 and 1135.
This movement of converting debts with a mortgage
 lien into stocks contrasts sharply with the inability
 of the railroads during the first two years
after the war, to sell stock in any considerable amount
        <pb n="237" />
        212 The Stock Market Crash—And After
or to finance their needs except by bonded issues.
But, in 1929, the New York, New Haven and Hartford
 Railroad also decided to fund its bonded
indebtedness.
While the stock price level rose in the long bull
market, investors increasingly took the new view of
the relative merits of stocks and bonds for investment.
 They no longer distrusted company shares.
They responded whole-heartedly to the invitation to
share the risks and advantages of partnerships. Not
only individuals but institutions began to buy stocks
in certain proportions through their bonded investments.

From Yale University, for example, came the report
 of the University Treasurer, in October, 1929,
that of its investments, bonds comprised only about
38 per cent; mortgage loans 13 per cent; real estate
12 per cent; and stocks about 33 per cent. These
proportions were in strong contrast with 1919, when
63 per cent of Yale's investments were in the form
of bonds and only 10 per cent in the form of stocks.
But Yale had learned her lesson during the war and
post-war inflation of commodity prices, which depreciated
 the purchasing power of the dollar to such
extent that a “drive” was instituted to increase the
University’s endowment for salaries of its teaching
staff by $20,000,000.

Savings Institutions Turn to Common Stocks
[nvestments in common stocks by large estates
had so increased, by 1929, that Arthur W. Loasby,
        <pb n="238" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 213
Chairman of the Board of the Equitable Trust Company
 of New York, reported during November that
49 per cent of the assets of large estates were in
equity securities.
Furthermore, savings banks and other fiduciary
institutions were seeking added legislation to invest
in common shares. Even during heavy declines in
stock, for example, the President of the Boston Five
Cent Savings Bank said on October 16, 1929:
“We must serve our depositors by investing in
that type of securities that they desire. It is their
money that we are handling. If we do not invest it
according to their wishes, then they will withdraw
it from our institution. That has been amply demonstrated
 during the past year. As it is clearly their
desire to invest their money in common stocks, we
must be able to invest it as they desire when it is
left in our charge.
“If we are to change our laws so as to permit investments
 in common stocks of the highest grade,
we must necessarily also have the right to increase
our surplus, perhaps from 25 to 50 per cent or possibly
 100 per cent. With this accumulated surplus
there would be large earnings that ought to be applied
 to the current dividends.”
Now the change toward stocks has taken place.
The average monthly output of new bond offerings
in 1927 was more than four times as large as in
1919; in 1928 it was only three and one-half times
as large as in 1919, and for the first ten months in
1929, it diminished to two and one-half times the
        <pb n="239" />
        214 The Stock Market Crash—And After

1919 total. These figures also show, however, that
bonds are still the chief investment.

Common Stock Investment May Be Overdone
In an article published on May 28, 1928, I said
that while the theory is sound, investment in common
 stocks can be overdone, especially when every
one is buying them. The codperative buying of
diversified stock securities should be done with full
knowledge that it may be affected by overspeculation,
and that, after all, common stock investments are not
based on guaranteed income. When the average
yield of common stock falls below § per cent, the
investor must look very sharply at the prospects of
the companies in question, and then it is wise for him
to buy other securities as well.
The purchase of bonds and preferred stocks is
more advisable if the commodity price level tips
downward, as it has done since 1925. For when the
price level of commodities declines, holders of bonds
profit by the rise in purchasing power of the dollar,
both in their interest and in their principal.
Mr. Leland Rex Robinson, whose book on investment
 trusts is standard, recently called attention to
the generally high-grade character of securities purchased
 by leading investment trusts during 1929,
and the great distribution of risks which many of
them show in their holdings. Mr. Robinson distinguishes,
 of course, between investment trusts
proper and holding companies which control, manage
 and finance groups of subsidiaries. These hold-
        <pb n="240" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 215
ing companies differ radically from the true investment
 trusts in that their function is to manage the
securities of the companies which they hold, which
means that they fix the policies of those concerns.
Their holdings, therefore, are “frozen” while the
holdings of a general management trust are liquid.

FINANCING ey INVESTMENT TRUSTS AND

TRADING AND HOLDING COMPANIES 1929

RA

LOO

SOURCE!
COMMERCIAL &amp;amp; FIN. CHRONICLE,

LOC

yy

MILLIONS OF DOLLARS |

yo

HET Oricon.
JAN. FEB. MAR APR, MAY, JUN. JUL. AUG, SEP. OCT. NOV. DEC.
Cuarr 23.~The classification of “Investment Trusts” on which
the Commercial and Financial Chronicle bases its figures is not to
be identified with the stricter classification bv Leland Rex. Robinson.

—

[n addition there are investment companies that are
likewise sometimes called investment trusts. There
are finance companies, also, that are sometimes called
investment trusts, although they are promotional
companies and manage the concerns in which they
are interested. Even financial trading companies
which answer to the term of “blind pools” have at
times assumed the name of investment trusts or have
        <pb n="241" />
        216 The Stock Market Crash—And After
been called investment trusts. These organizations
are avowedly of the most speculative type and are
more risky than the investment trust proper, because
they may heavily concentrate their holdings. It is
concerning investment trusts proper that Mr.
Robinson says:
“It 1s important to bear in mind that even in the
recently closed period of excessive common stock
emphasis, there were many investment trusts which
were consistently buying in less buoyant foreign markets
 and giving their securities portfolios a strong
anchor to windward in the form of large bond holdings.
 A high proportion of seasoned and marketable
 securities, the ownership of bonds as well as
stocks, and the ability to liquidate on foreign market
 have all contributed to give some investment
trusts a further purchasing power during the recent
doldrums.”
Mr. Robinson finds that the investment trust movement
 as a whole seems to have been “relatively free
from such systematic abuses as might have been
feared in view of its recent origin, its amazingly rapid
growth, and the unprecedented situation in the stock
market.” He adds that it does not appear likely that
the American companies as a whole will pass through
“any such term of painful reconstruction, both of
financial structures and of public confidence, as many
of the British financial companies and investment
trusts did in the years 1890 to 1896.” The majority
of them show comparatively large ratios of total
investment funds raised by issuance of capital stock.
        <pb n="242" />
        Flight From Bonds to Stocks 217

Conversely, funded indebtedness is absent, or the
restriction of such indebtedness as compared with
total paid-in capital, so that bondholders and shareholders
 are both protected. Also, there has been
comparatively little borrowing of banks, the investment
 trusts, Mr. Robinson says, “having only in
exceptional cases exceeded the limits of prudence in
the use of short-term credits.” He finds that many
leading funds and companies were in reasonably
liquid position at the time the most serious price declines
 started. Many had been strongly fortified
late in October by a relatively high proportion of
call loans and cash items.
Of the public financing to a total of $2,440,000,
000, reported by the Commercial and Financial
Chronicle for “investment trusts and trading and
holding companies” during the first ten months of
1929, it is stated that over 9§ per cent was in stocks.
Mr. Robinson observes that the greater part of all
this capital was ‘“‘obviously raised for finance, trading,
 and holding companies, rather than for investment
 trusts.” For this reason he warns against the
easy habit of lumping together such radically different
 companies, funds, and common law trusts. When
they are properly defined, it will be found that investment
 trusts proper weathered the panic in much
better condition than the speculative pools and individual
 operators, chiefly through their steady reliance
upon the principle of diversification and skilled scrutiny
 in making and changing their investments.
        <pb n="243" />
        CHAPTER XIV

SPECULATION AND BROKERS' LOANS

UNDOUBTEDLY the contagion of the long bull
market had encouraged unwise speculation. But the
main trouble was that so much borrowed money was
used. It might have been entirely proper had the
speculators used their own money in following a generally
 sound judgment to profit by reasonably
expected gains in the future.
Speculation in itself may do either good or harm.
It does good when it reduces the inequality of prices
at different times. It does harm when it aggravates
this inequality. In the first case, which may be called
the normal one, the interests of the speculator and
the public are to a large extent identical. When the
speculator is correct in his prognostications, he will
make a profit. His object is to make a profit when
prices are rising, but he can do so only by mitigating
the rise. Likewise his object is to make a profit
when prices are falling, but he can do so onlv by
mitigating the fall.
His profits are, as it were, a reward paid him by
the community for mitigating price changes. If he
makes a mistake in either form of speculation, he suffers
 losses, and these losses may be regarded as a
sort of penalty he suffers for aggravating the inequal-218
        <pb n="244" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 219
ities in prices. Since the interests of the speculator
and of the public are thus normally parallel, there is
a premium put on wise and beneficial speculation and
a penalty on unwise and injurious speculation.
It is unfortunately true, however, that in spite of
the penalties for unwise and injurious speculation
much speculation is of this latter character. This is
partly due to the fact that many engage in speculation
 who have no adequate equipment for so doing,
and no independent judgment as to the causes making
 for a rise or a fall in prices. The ultimate justification
 for speculating must rest in the wisdom and
independence of those who speculate. Speculation
which merely follows a “tip” has no independent
value. If every person who speculates for a rise or
a fall should do so on a basis of his own best independent
 judgement, the chances are that the stakes of
those who are overconfident in either direction would
largely offset each other.

Speculation That Is Gambling
During the recent years of the long bull market,
no doubt too many of the general public were beguiled
 into the folly of entering the speculating market
 as individuals. Swayed by a superstitious regard
for “tips,” they played the game alone without the
benefit of investment counsel, and without participation
 in investment trusts conducted on sound principles.
 But as individuals the general public have
usually little special knowledge of market conditions,
and their participation in the market except through
        <pb n="245" />
        220 The Stock Market Crash—And After
expert guidance is almost as apt to aggravate as to
alleviate the inequalities in prices.
[n such cases speculation becomes little more than
gambling. In fact, it is worse than gambling, for the
evils are more extensive, being communicated to
others than the gamblers themselves. Such evils of
speculation are especially grave when, as usually happens,
 the general public speculates in a mass, that is,
all in the same direction.
We see, then, that the chief evils of speculation are
largely the work of the unprofessional speculators,
just as the chief evils of reckless automobile driving
are due to untrained chauffeurs.
[t must not be supposed, however, that the professional
 speculator is always a public benefactor.
Not only may he also make mistakes which cost him
and society dear, but he may sometimes “rig the market”
 and manipulate prices. There is a vast difference
 between merely anticipating the market and
manipulating it. When a professional speculator
merely attempts to take advantage of an impending
rise or fall of prices, he is usually a public benefactor;
 but when he attempts to create the rise or fall,
of which he is to take advantage, by false reports,
by “cornering,” or by sudden and great short selling,
especially in conspiracy with others to cause a panic,
he becomes a mischief maker.
In short, the speculator who correctly anticipates,
and so mitigates, price changes does good, while he
who manipulates, and so aggravates price changes
does harm.
        <pb n="246" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 221

Undoubtedly the contagion of the long bull market
 had encouraged unwise speculation. But for the
most part it was unwise in a peculiar sense, namely,
that it would have been entirely proper had the speculators
 used their own money in following a generally
sound judgment to profit by reasonably expected
gains in the future.

Function of Brokers’ Loans
Did brokers’ loans rise too high during the period
preceding the panic? If so, should there be some
method of governing their output and of restricting
them to prevent undue speculation?
President E. H. H. Simmons of the New York
Stock Exchange, in an address before the Indiana
Bankers’ Association at Evansville, September 11th,
defended brokers’ loans, notwithstanding their abuse
in inflating the stock market, and notwithstanding
the discrimination against them embodied in the
Federal Reserve Act.
“To wipe out brokers’ loans or violently reduce
them,” Mr. Simmons told the Indiana bankers,
“would inevitably slow up American industry; if not
totally halt its continued progress.”
Before new securities will appeal to outright investors,
 he pointed out, they must be seasoned. New
industries and new extensions of industry need tremendous
 outlays if they are to get promptly into
large-scale production, with its attendant economies
and lower prices.
This need is met, in part, by holding the new
        <pb n="247" />
        222 The Stock Market Crash—And After
securities in the market as a floating supply until investors
 will buy them at prices mutually advantageous
to them and to the industries.
By this process brokers’ loans aided mass production
 for the motor car industry; they hastened the
day of the radio in every home, and of the photoplay
 in every neighborhood and hamlet. They
SIMILARITY IN MOVEMENTS :

AROKERS Loans —1
5T0CK VALUES ====1926
 * 100 ik

Los

A

CHART 24.—As stock prices increased, reflecting greater expectations
 of profits due to improved processes, the public resorted more
and more to borrowing in order to share in prospective gains.

may help to establish the American airplane industry
 on a scale greater than would otherwise be
possible.
How did the extraordinary growth in brokers’
loans come about?
Fred I. Kent has made a study of the expansion
of these loans during 1929, the substance of which is
embodied in his address before the American Acceptance
 Council on November 11, 1929. The study is
linked with an accounting of new security flotations,
        <pb n="248" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 223
of which brokers’ loans constituted 7 per cent during
the five years ended with 1928. But during the
first nine months of 1929, brokers’ loans rose by
$1,700,000,000, or by about 20 per cent of the value
of new issues, of which the total was $8,419,000,000.
Here was a striking increase in loans from 7 per
cent of new security issues during the five years preceding
 1929, to 20 per cent during the first three
quarters of 1929.

Overextension of Credits
On the assumption that national income during
these three quarters was $58,500,000,000, Mr. Kent
finds that an abnormal amount of this national income
 went into brokers’ loans. He figures that 915
per cent of income is the normal amount available
for new securities and increased saving deposits, and
that $5,557,500,000 was “all that could be utilized
for investment purposes.” But the new security issues
 during the first three quarters of 1929 amounted
to $8,419,000,000, or $2,811,000,000 more than
this $5,557,500,000 available from income. Moreover,
 $2,884,000,000 was involved in the “rights”
for the total of new securities issued during this interval,
 swelling the total to $11,303,000,000 for the
first nine months of 1929, or 20 per cent of the
national income during that period. Inasmuch as
brokers’ loans rose by $1,700,000,000, Mr. Kent
estimates that the balance must have come from
abroad and from the addition which brokers’ loans
made against securities.
        <pb n="249" />
        224 The Stock Market Crash—And After

New Problems Due to Discounting of Gains

He draws the conclusion that there were sound
business reasons for the rise in securities, but that
the discounting of expected business gains gave rise
to a new set of problems which resulted in the security
 markets going forward too fast. Mr. Kent summarizes
 as follows:
“We find that sound business growth was at the
bottom of the normal rise in the price of securities,
that politics as exercised in the capital-gain tax prevented
 sales of securities which would have acted to
hold the prices within bounds, that uncertainties
caused by political blocs in Congress changed the
forward-looking national psychology into one of
uncertainty, that new securities were created and issued
 more rapidly than the public could absorb, and
that their intrusion in brokers’ loans and other security
 loans was not intelligently understood; that
certain of these forces worked to create high prices
for securities and others to undermine such prices
after they had been attained.”
Mr. Kent has taken an important view of the
growth of brokers’ loans. But he fails to make clear
that these loans do not necessarily represent real
money or added drafts on the national income. To
a large extent they are simply “indices of suspended
titles.” To show this a friend who has given it
special study supplies an example:
Assume first that “A” owns one share of New
York Central stock which cost him $65; that “B”
        <pb n="250" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 22%
has $35 in cash; that “‘C” has $50 in cash; and that
“D" is a broker.
Now let “B” buy the share from “A” at $100
through “D,” paying $35 cash and leaving $65 as
a brokers’ loan, this being provided by a call loan of
$65 from “A” to “D.”
Then let “C” buy from “B” at $150, paying $50
cash and leaving $100 as a broker's loan, the increase
 in the total of brokers’ loans from $65 to
$100 being provided by a call loan of $35 from “B”
to “D.?

As the final result of the preceding transactions
we have the same single share of stock in existence,
but with an increase in market price from $65 to
$150. There is no change in the total cash, which
was originally $85, except that “A” now has $35 and
“B” $50, while “C” has no cash. And the total
of brokers’ loans, or $100, represents not only the
rise from $65 to $150 in market value, but also
the diminished equity of “C” in the share, that is,
$50, as compared with the $65 original equity of
“A”. Furthermore, all transactions have been “paper’’
 transactions and have involved no recourse even
to bank credit.
To continue this example in the reverse direction,
“C” might, after a market crash, sell the share to
“A” for $65, with the result that “A” would have
his original share plus $35 cash, “B” would have $50
cash as before (plus his loss of $35 to “D”), and
“C” would have less than nothing to the extent of
the $35 still owing to “D.”
        <pb n="251" />
        226 The Stock Market Crash—And After

Influence of Gold Exports

Mr. Kent's analysis is supplemented by the view
of Mr. George E. Roberts of the National City
Bank of New York. Addressing the Academy of
Political Science of New York on November 22,
1929, Mr. Roberts discussed the influence of the
plethora of gold that came to this country because
of what he calls the abnormal social, political and
economic conditions in Europe after the war; this
was followed by our export of gold to aid European
reconstruction during 1927 and 1928, when many
countries were returning to the gold basis and a
large aggregate of foreign loans was floated in the
American market. By the export of gold in this
period we suffered a net loss of $500,000,000 in the
basic standard metal. Mr. Roberts says:
“The change in the situation effected by the loss
of gold, while influencing the attitude of the banks,
did not command the attention it deserved from the
speculative public. The market was under too much
momentum to take it seriously. The market was
strong in the opinion that it could get what money it
needed by paying higher interest rates, and proceeded
to demonstrate that theory with considerable success.
Of course, it is known that higher interest rates will
attract money. They have a saying in London that
10 per cent will draw gold out of the ground.”
As a reason for these high rates Mr. Roberts furnishes
 this example:
“Throughout the four years 1918 to 1921, New
        <pb n="252" />
        SOURCES OF BROKERS’ FUNDS

BILLIONS
oF &amp;amp;
5

f

»
Ny

£

{

KR

1.0

3 5

30

&amp;gt; 8

2 0

].5§

YM

rm a

]. r

3. X

1926

1927

1908

1929

~o
.
: 3%
fe

CHART 25.~—The long bull market was largely sustained by the
Dew banking business improvised by “others,” chiefly corporations
that had piled up loanable funds out of earnings or the proceeds of
[EW Security issues.

2A
        <pb n="253" />
        228 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
York Central stock was selling around $65 a share.
It was paying § per cent dividends, and at the market
 price the yield was nearly 8 per cent. After
1920, capital was accumulated, gold was pouring in
and enlarging the basis of credit. By the middle of
1922 time loans on mixed stock exchange collateral
were down to 44 per cent and call loans much of
the time lower. The average renewal rate on call
loans for the whole year 1924 was 3.1 per cent.
“The public is quick to take advantage of such an
opportunity as that to borrow money on a 3 or 4 per
cent basis and carry New York Central stock on a 7
or 8 per cent basis. That was the first impetus to
the stock market. And when a market gets well
under way it travels on its own momentum. It is
able of itself to attract support. Of course, such
movements go too far. More people do things because
 other people are doing them than because they
know the reasons, and that is progressively so of a
bull market. The market had occasional back-sets
in 1925 and 1026, but on the whole gained confidence
on the recoveries, until in the fall of 1927 something
happened.”
That something was the withdrawal of the half
billion dollars gold to Europe. Mr. Roberts shows
that the New York City banks withdrew their support
 of the growing account of brokers’ loans
and were not responsible for its growth from
October, 1927, to 1929. The high interest rates
of the call loan markets attracted funds from
        <pb n="254" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 229
other sources. The loans for “other,” namely,
corporations and individuals who instructed the
banks of which they were patrons to lend funds
for them in the call market, amounted to $922,000,-000
 in October, 1927. In October, 1929, the loans
for “others” amounted to $3,907,000,000, having
more than quadrupled in two years. The loans for
out-of-town banks increased by 50 per cent. Both
classes of loans increased by $3,500,000,000.
“The market,” Mr. Roberts says, “had found a
way to go around the banking system to the original
sources of funds, that is, in savings, profits and other
free funds that would normally go into permanent
investments.’

Higher Foreign Discount Rates
But the rising interest rates called American capital
 from its employment abroad and transferred
foreign capital to this country. By October, 1929,
we had recovered one-half of the half billion gold
exported during the preceding two years.
This alarmed the central banks in Europe. fifteen
of which raised their rediscount rates during 1929,
while Canada and Argentina set up embargoes on
gold exports to this country. With the increase in
the Bank of England discount rate to the unusual
figure of 614 per cent on September 26, New York
exchange depreciated, indicating the withdrawal of
foreign funds from our market. The situation was
aggravated by the failure of the issuing house of
        <pb n="255" />
        230 The Stock Market Crash—And After
Hatry in London, which was the signal for a recession
 on the London Stock Exchange, followed by a
decline on the Paris and Berlin Exchanges.
The withdrawal of foreign funds was signalized
by a rise in brokers’ loans in New York while the
market was falling, which indicated that the withdrawal
 forced American borrowing to replace the
funds exported.

Panic Shrinkage of Brokers’ Loans
However, this was the last influence that tended
to work the brokers’ loan account upward. Thenceforward
 the weekly reports of the Federal Reserve
Board recorded unprecedented declines. After the
climb to $6,804,000,000, reported September 25 by
the Federal Reserve Board, there was a shrinkage in
the total by $2,440,559,111 during October. With
the report of December 26th by the Federal Reserve
Board, the account had declined to the lowest point
since September 28, 1927. There had been a cut of
$3,483,000,000, or more than 50 per cent.
The foregoing analysis of Mr. Roberts is the best
I know of regarding the factors of gold and credit.
The essential points are:
(1) After 1920, as a post-war and post-crisis
reaction, gold accumulated in America, artificially
depressing the short-time rates of interest in the
money market, below the rates justified by underlying
 economic conditions.
(2) These low short-time rates contrasted sharply
with the high yields on common stocks, the prices of
        <pb n="256" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 231

which were then far too low, not having yet been
adjusted to the results of war-inflation. Through
that inflation the dollar had lost a third of its purchasing
 power. But the public had not yet been convinced
 that the change was permanent and were loath
to revalue stocks on the basis of permanently inflated
dividends in terms of dollars.
(3) These two contrasted rates, the abnormally
low interest rates and the abnormally high stock
yields, led to borrowings at 3 or 4 per cent to buy
stocks yielding 7 or 8 per cent, thus initiating the bull
movement.
(4) The withdrawal of gold to Europe in 1927,
consequent on the resumption there of the gold standard
 and the later withdrawal of American bank funds
from the stock market, failed to stop the movement
because, by this time, corporations had acquired so
prosperous a cash position as to supply the brokers’
loans themselves.
(5) The net result was a rise in interest rates
which reattracted gold from Europe and led to European
 central banks raising their rates.
(6) This may have helped precipitate the crash
in London, and the drop on the Paris and Berlin
Exchanges, which in turn, reénforced the growing
 bearish pressure on the New York Stock
Exchange.

New York Banks Lend Aid
During the market crisis the Reserve Bank at New
York released credit to the member banks, which
        <pb n="257" />
        232 The Stock Market Crash—And After

enabled them to take over one billion dollars of market
 loans that had been made by outside lenders.
This action Mr. Roberts justifies, although he admits
that ‘‘it might be said to be for a purpose not contemplated
 in the Reserve Act.” He adds:
“It is to be considered, however, that the ultimate
purpose of the Reserve system is to stabilize and
protect the general credit situation. In pursuance of
this purpose the action was amply justified, and on
the basis of this justification it is possible to go even
further and say that intervention would be warranted
for the purpose of averting an impending disaster.
This would be admitting that the exercise of judgment
 would be warranted in a critical situation,
which, of course, would mean that opinions might
differ among the Reserve authorities as to the gravity
of a situation.”
Mr. Roberts defends the restriction of use which
member banks could make of Federal Reserve funds
against financing transactions in stocks and bonds.
These funds were, according to the intentions of
those who framed the Federal Reserve Act, to be
used only for short loans, to aid in financing seasonal
turnover of trade. This financing is limited and the
funds are soon released, whereas “there is no end
to the amount of credit which might be tied up in
financing stocks and bonds,” and this would not be of
short duration. The Reserve banks had kept out of
a situation that involved an increase in brokers’ loans
from three billion dollars to eight and one-half billion
 dollars within two and one-half years and were
        <pb n="258" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 233
in prime condition to provide ample credits for trade
and industry.

Federal Reserve Policy
Useful as the Federal Reserve System has proved
during the emergency in furnishing ample credit facilities
 to replace the tremendous withdrawals of “bootleg”
 loans from “others,” representing corporations
and individuals who had helped inflate the totals of
brokers’ loans, the Federal Reserve Board had not
functioned so acceptably during the prior period that
led up to this abnormal development.
In a statement issued February 6, 1929, it looked
as though the Reserve Board had assumed an aggressive
 policy. It issued a warning with respect to the
accumulation of speculative credits that was, in a
sense, epoch-making. For the first time it asserted
its responsibility and authority to manage the credit
facilities of the system in the interests of commerce
and business. It said:
“When it [the Board] finds that conditions are
arising which obstruct Federal Reserve Banks in the
effective discharge of their function, of so managing
the credit facilities of the Federal Reserve System as
to accommodate commerce and business, it is its duty
to inquire into them and to take such measures as
may be deemed suitable and effective in the circumstances
 to correct them; this, in the immediate situation,
 means to restrain the use, either directly or indirectly,
 of Federal Reserve credit facilities in aid of
the growth of speculative credit.”
        <pb n="259" />
        234 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

This statement had been preceded by a letter to
the Reserve Banks, dated February 2, defining their
obligations as to what credit should and should not
be granted at that time. The statement noted the
record of six years of remarkable economic activity,
and their unprecedented volume of production and
consumption of goods. It declared:
“The economic system of the country has functioned
 efficiently and smoothly. Among the factors
which have contributed to this result an important
place must be assigned to our credit system, and,
notably, to the steadying influence and moderating
policies of the Federal Reserve System.”
As the guardian of business, therefore, the Reserve
 Board assumed responsibility for credit control
in efficient and smooth functioning of the nation’s
economic system. The New York Reserve Bank was
reported as urging an advance in the rediscount
rate to 6 per cent from its § per cent level. This the
Federal Reserve Board declined to sanction. The
measure would have brought the rediscount rate close
to general market rates, thus making it effective. But
the Board at Washington, torn by differing opinions,
backed and filled during the Spring and Summer, trying
 to isolate one part of the money market by discriminatory
 measures against brokers’ loans. It was
urged that a rise in the discount rate would “hurt
business” and would deprive Europe of needed gold.
But had this aggressive policy been pursued from the
beginning it would have been found that business
could have stood the higher rate during a period of
        <pb n="260" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 23%
expanding prosperity, while keeping the rate artificially
 low served to stimulate speculation instead of
checking it. People were borrowing at low rates in
order to make high rates in expanding business.
Even had business been hurt by the proposed higher
rate, there would have been but a few months of
business recession followed by easier money conditions,
 and the panic, with its untoward results involying
 far greater damage, would have been averted. In
his recent address before the Academy of Political
Science in New York. Dr. Benjamin Haggott Beckhart
 notes:
“The management and direction of our banking
system in the past few years leaves much to be
desired. The Reserve Banks have failed to develop
a philosophy of credit control, due in part no doubt
to the division of counsel within the system. Commercial
 banks, largely by virtue of extraneous circumstances
 over which they had no control, but partly
volitionally, have greatly increased their holdings
of bonds and security loans, whose ‘liquidity’
depends on a rising or at least stable security
market.”
In the same vein Mr. Benjamin M. Anderson, Jr.,
economist of the Chase National Bank of New York,
characterized as unfortunate the “cheap money
policy” of the Federal Reserve Board in his address
December 30, 1929, before the American Economic
 Association in Washington. Mr. Anderson
declared that the ideal situation would have been a
rediscount rate above the market, buttressed bv the
        <pb n="261" />
        236 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
Board’s open market policy, which would have been
helpful in holding down both customers’ and brokers’
loans.
For several years the country has had surplus gold,
with potentialities of credit inflation that have been
restricted by devices of “earmarking” and the policy
of buying and selling government securities in the
open market under the auspices of the Federal Reserve
 Board's Open Market Committee. This has
been supplemented by business methods restricting
inventories to actual trade demands. But the policy
of the Federal Reserve Board during the year preceding
 August, 1929, when the Reserve Bank at New
York was belatedly permitted to increase the =ediscount
 rate to 6 per cent, encouraged the inflation of
the stock market with surplus credits.
While the country was enjoying unparalleled commercial
 prosperity and stability, and while the inflated
stock market credits aided in financing American
industries, the outcome has proved disastrous to
American security holders. This might have been
avoided by a sharp increase in the discount rate during
 the Fall of 1928 or at any time up to the Spring
of 1929, with comparatively little consequent hardship
 to business. The overissuance of shares during
August and September would have been prevented,
and any shortage of credit to business would have
been largely remedied through an orderly deflation of
brokers’ loans. The ultimate effect of such an
aggressive policy would have been a gradual decline
in the peak of stock prices. The new plateau would
        <pb n="262" />
        Speculation and Brokers’ Loans 237

have shown a level, say, 15 per cent below the peak
actually attained in September, instead of the abrupt
declivity 42 per cent below that peak, with its drastic
shrinkage of values on the New York Stock
Exchange by $26,000,000,000.
        <pb n="263" />
        CHAPTER XV
REMEDIES AND PREVENTIVES OF PANIC
WHAT measures were applied to alleviate the
stress of the panic?
What remedies were proposed to prevent its
repetition ?

Governmental and Banking Relief
To the reassurance afforded the nation by the
President’s conferences with business leaders, was
added the cut of $160,000,000 in income taxes,
passed by Congress on December 14th, at the suggestion
 of Secretary Mellon. This reduced the tax
by one per cent of the incomes of all individuals and
corporations taxes on incomes for the calendar year
1929. It was passed as a measure of reassurance to
business, as taking in earnest the statement by Secretary
 Mellon that: “The indications are that business
 profits, dividends, interest, and wage payments in
1929 will considerably exceed those of the year 1928.
Our estimates indicate that the government should
close both the fiscal years of 1930 and 1931 with a
surplus.”
The banks lent powerful support after the loans to
brokers by non-banking lenders declined during Octo-~9Q
        <pb n="264" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 239
ber, 1929, by two billion dollars. This withdrawal
of funds from the call-loan market was by foreign
lenders, investment and trading companies, and other
corporations and individuals. In addition, loans to
brokers for out-of-town banks including loans for
account of their customers, diminished by $800,000,-000.
 In these circumstances, the New York City
banks came to the rescue, increasing loans for their
own account by $1,000,000,000; also, they increased
their security and other loans to customers, and their
investments. The weekly reporting member banks
in leading cities increased their total loans and investments
 in this way from October 2d to October 30th,
by $1,600,000,000. Most of this increase was in
New York City banks, whose net demand deposits
rose by $1,500,000,000 from October 23rd to October
 3oth. With this increase their reserve requirements
 grew, adding to their reserve balances with
the Federal Reserve Bank by $240,000,000. During
 this crowded week the Reserve Bank of New
York added $150,000,000 to its discounts from member
 banks; and let loose a fresh stream of credits by
purchasing $150,000,000 worth of United States
Government securities in the open market.
By such measures money rates eased during the
height of the panic. Call-money rates had prevailed
at eight to nine per cent during September, but fell
to six per cent in the latter part of October, and,
through the panic and subsequent liquidation, ranged
at and below six per cent to 414 per cent. On October
 31st, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York
        <pb n="265" />
        240 The Stock Market Crash—And After
lowered its discount rate to five per cent and a little
later to 414 per cent.
Thus “tight-money” conditions were obviated, and
a billion dollars of extra credit was provided, proving
 the strength and resourcefulness of the Federal
Reserve System.

Inquiry Concerning “Bear Raids”
Another measure of undoubted efficacy was the
New York Stock Exchange inquiry concerning evidence
 of “bear raids.” The exchange on November
13th called on members to report in detail about
stocks they had lent or borrowed on which there had
been a failure to deliver, with the exception of odd
lots. No explanation accompanied this action. Undoubtedly
 its purpose was to identify such “big bear
operators” as were, possibly, responsible for the
repeated attacks on the market. The very nature of
such an inquiry was deterrent in discouraging organized
 short-selling of the character that would further
 unbalance a panic-stricken market. The inquiry
was slightly retroactive, requiring information as of
the close of business November 12, 1929; it required
subsequent daily reports of changes involving failure
to deliver listed stocks that had been loaned or borrowed
 up to November 25th, when the daily questionnaire
 was abandoned. The decision to call for
this information was made at a time when stocks
were at their lowest point and seemed to be at the
mercy of bear raiders. Members of the voluntary
banking group that had met for several days in the
        <pb n="266" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 241
offices of J. P. Morgan &amp;amp; Company were understood
to have been informed as to the general results shown
by this questionnaire. While no great concentration
of short interest was revealed, it is understood that
the absence of such interest was due to hurried covering
 immediately before the calling for the questionnaire.
 Immediately upon announcement of the inquiry
 a sharp covering movement became manifest
on the exchange, and it was reported that the subsequent
 rally in stocks had been naturally helped by the
measure as a check to bear operators. In fact, this
measure in all probability saved the market from further
 disaster.

Waiving of Margin Requirements
Still another measure was, in part, involuntary.
During the height of the panic many brokers admitted
 that they had declined to sell out insolvent
accounts, waiving margin requirements. Margin
calls had been sent out on October 28th, for example,
 with the idea that the market had “touched
bottom.” It was expected that accounts would need
only small additional margins, at worst. But the
market fell severely on that day. Adequate margins
could not be deposited in time to cover many of the
accounts, and the brokers faced the dilemma of
throwing more stocks on the falling market, which
would involve actual losses to the brokers in addition
to wiping out their customers’ accounts or of keeping
 them at possible loss to themselves. The ac.
counts were carried over until, with tardy rallyings
        <pb n="267" />
        242 The Stock Market Crash—And After

of the market, the withheld securities might be
judiciously fed into the stream of sales. These rallies
were further helped by the expedient of extra dividend
 declarations on the part of such market leaders
as United States Steel, American Can and others,
out of their ample surpluses, derived, in most cases,
from earnings plowed-back into the companies over
a series of years.

Aid to Stock-holding Employees
Many large corporations which had sold stocks to
employees, including United States Steel and Standard
 Oil of New York, undertook to protect the holdings
 of their employees by making loans on the stock
above the prices which had prevailed on the New
York Stock Exchange. Thus the Standard Oil Company
 of New York accepted its own shares for loans
to employees at a price $11 above the prices which
had been ruling. It was reported, however, that less
than one per cent of employees of this company required
 any aid whatever.

Proposal to Examine Banks
Inasmuch as the banks, in coming to the rescue of
the market, became involved in the carrying of large
blocks of “frozen” loans on securities, one financial
newspaper, the New York Journal of Commerce,
has urged that the government put the banks
throughout the country into a position to resist
strain imposed on them by such a situation. It urged
careful and effective bank examination for several
        <pb n="268" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 243
months to come, and application of necessary
remedies as indicated, saying:
“The result undoubtedly will be the reorganization
of a great many banks which have become overburdened
 with doubtful paper. This happened after the
panic of 1920, and has also happened in the case of
practically all preceding panics.”
Without attempting to prejudge this proposal, it
should be remembered that the panic of 1929 was
unlike all preceding panics. Under its unique conditions,
 the member banks were well out of debt to the
Federal Reserve banks. The banking system met the
demand for additional loans without disturbing
money market rates. Had they not met it, these
rates would have soared, as is usual in panics, when
men and institutions must borrow at any rate to preserve
 their solvency.

Proposal of an Artificial “Floor” of Minimum
Prices

A very constructive proposal by James H. Rand,
Jr., but unfortunately not acted upon, was that the
New York Stock Exchange establish an artificial
“floor” at the minimum of prices as of a given day
of the panic.
This expedient had already been employed at the
reopening of the stock exchange on the outbreak of
the World War in 1914, after the five months’ suspension
 of its activities. The application of this
measure is described by H. G. S. Noble, President of
the Exchange at that time, in his book, The New
        <pb n="269" />
        244 The Stock Market Crash—dnd After
York Stock Exchange in 1914 (published by the
Country Life Press, 1915). Mr. Noble says:
“The reopening was accompanied by the restraint
of certain arbitrary minimum prices, below which
securities could not be sold. It was felt that, owing
to the critical and indecisive state of the war, there
was a continuing possibility of some news that might
renew a crisis in the market. While this possibility
lasted, the maintenance of minimum prices furnished
an automatic check upon sudden panic, which would
avoid raising the question of a second closing of the
exchange. In order to regulate these minimum
prices and so change them from time to time and to
keep them in accord with normal supply and demand,
it was necessary to appoint a committee, and the
original Five were continued in office with this sole
regulative power. As bonds were similarly restricted,
the Committee of Three [in charge of the bond side
of the market] also lingered on the scene for the
same purpose. The two committees performed this
unusual function up to the first of April, 1915, when
the very marked improvement in conditions led to
the abandonment of this last vestige of artificial
restraint.”
Thus from December 15, following the report of
the Special Committee of Five to the governing committee
 of the Stock Exchange announcing that it
might be reopened, until the following April of 1915,
the Exchange explained that prices of securities were
restricted as a safeguard against some unforeseen
shock to confidence.
        <pb n="270" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 245

The contention is that during the 1929 break the
governing authorities of the Exchange might have
come to its rescue in order to save the market from
a price level which was universally admitted to be
far below any reasonable estimate of the worth of
stocks traded. It has been said that the same scheme
was partly balked in 1914 by a ‘“‘gutter” market
which spontaneously sprang up. This showed that
it was impossible to keep traders from each other
very long against their will. There is a big difference
 between a long and a short period; the essence
of the scheme in 1929 was of a moratorium—to
extend enough but not too long the time for getting
buyers. That is, the virtue of the idea was not to fix
the minimum price, so much as thereby to give reasonable
 time for a natural price to appear in place of
the artificially low price of suddenly forced sales.
Auctioneers have a minimum price on each article
offered at auction for any one day. Foreclosures on
mortgages require time, and ample notice given
through advertisement in order to gather buyers to
the scene of the foreclosure, from whom a natural
competition is to be expected to produce a reasonable
price for the foreclosed property. The stock exchange
 is the only place of public sale where the
forced selling of property is made instantaneous—to
the great detriment, during panic, of transfers by
any proper estimate of the value of stocks. It is not
always a practicable requirement. Every action
requires time.
There are records that the London and Conti-
        <pb n="271" />
        246 The Stock Market Crash—And After
nental Exchanges have acted at such junctures to
establish an artificial floor of prices at the minimum
of the market, as of certain dates. Informally, also,
the jobbers who are invariably the intermediaries
between brokers on the London exchange have been
known at times to ‘‘desert’” the market, thus automatically
 shutting off trading, when they judged that
the prices of securities were declining to panic levels
and no longer represented a true estimate of values.
But, unlike the market specialists of the New York
Stock Exchange, the London jobbers are an essential
factor in the transfer of stocks on the London Exchange;
 they are forbidden to take any commission
in stock transactions, and would hardly be suspected
of ulterior motives of valorizing or sustaining prices,
if they quitted the market and virtually closed the
exchange when they deemed the level of prices to
have run dangerously low.
In the case of the New York Stock Exchange,
some action by the governors themselves would be
requisite to place this automatic check upon panic
prices in such an emergency as developed during
October and November, 1929. In addition to the
1914 precedent, there is precedent for this measure
in the rules of the New York Stock Exchange
whereby securities listed on the Exchange are stricken
from the list or trading therein is suspended by the
governing committee in cases wherein the committee
deems there is no fair market in such securities. In
specific cases the governing committee has provided
that contracts shall not be closed under the provisions
        <pb n="272" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 247

of this rule until the governing committee has determined
 that there is a fair market.

Proposed Safety Fund for Emergencies
In place of an informal and voluntary committee
of bankers acting unofficially, such as sustained the
market in the initial stages of the panic of 1929, I
am indebted to Mr. H. B. Meek, a Yale graduate
student, for the suggestion of a safety fund to be
used in such emergencies, accumulated over a series
of years from small payments subscribed by Stock
Exchange members. In the course of twenty years
or so, this safety fund would amount to a considerable
 sum, to be employed in a manner similar to
bankers’ consortium fund. to stabilize the market.

Proposed Definite Collateral Loan Policy
Another suggestion for market stabilization is
made by M. H. Cahill, President of the Plaza Trust
Company of New York, and formerly President of
the New York State Bankers’ Association. Mr.
Cahill’s proposal, published November 11, 1929,
follows *

“If the banks of the country, acting as a unit,
would adopt a definite loaning policy under which
they would not extend a collateral loan in excess of
75 to 80 per cent of the value of the security offered,
as determined by appraisal based on the previous
quarterly statement of earnings, the appraisal not to
exceed twenty times the net earnings, it would, ipso
facto, stabilize the market level of securities and
        <pb n="273" />
        248 The Stock Market Crash—And After
prevent the purchase of speculative values on
credit.”
Such a policy, Mr. Cahill asserts, would stabilize
security values on a basis where their purchase price
bears a direct relation to earnings. He believes it
would regulate credit to a point where a 25 per cent
margin would be sufficient, ‘because based on actual
and not on fictitious values.” Mr. Cahill declares
that he is not sure whether this would do away with
speculation entirely, but that it would quite definitely
“prevent rash speculation with borrowed funds.”

Proposed Basis of Value on Margins

Yet another suggestion for stabilizing the market,
is that of Mr. Fred I. Kent, Director of the Bankers’
Trust Company of New York. Mr. Kent recommends:

Create a joint committee of the New York Clearing
 House and Stock Exchange, whose duty it should
be to develop a basis of value upon which margins
for stocks should be figured from time to time on the
principle of net earnings to price, which would represent
 interest returns, and having due regard to current
 and near-future money values, and in the case
of new issues, on clearly defined prospects.”

Proposed Repeal of Capital Gains Tax
Mr. Kent makes four other suggestions, the first
of which is “Legislation removing the Federal Tax
on capital gains, also that in New York State and
any other state where such a tax may be in force.”
        <pb n="274" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 249

Proposed Report on Loans for Carrying
Securities
His second further proposal is to “Require changes
in methods of bookkeeping of all houses which buy
securities for distribution, in such manner as to enable
them to report to the Stock Exchange, and to enable
the banks to report to the Federal Reserve System,
total loans that represent funds obtained for the
purpose of carrying securities for distribution.”

Proposed Money Market Research
His third further suggestion is:
“An exhaustive research carried on under the
auspices of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York,
with the codperation of the New York Clearing
House and Stock Exchange, of our money market;
having in mind all the questions involved that have
a bearing upon the sources of supply, both domestic
and foreign, the methods of use, the market for
bankers’ acceptances, and the requirements of agriculture
 and industry, to be followed by recommendations
 for such changes in procedure, if any, as may
he found to be necessary for the public good.”

Proposed Committee on Listing of New Issues
His fourth suggestion is to create a joint committee
 of the New York Clearing House and Stock
Exchange, the lenders and the borrowers, to pass on
the listing of contemplated new security issues. This
Mr. Kent would have done on the basis of the fig-
        <pb n="275" />
        250 The Stock Market Crash—And After

ures showing the progress of total loans obtained for
the purpose of carrying securities for distribution,
together with the general conditions which prevail in
the money market.
Most of the preceding suggestions are evidently
based on the idea that safety standards should be set
up as to loans in relation to stock prices, earnings
and all other pertinent facts, just as standards have
been set up as to lines of credit extended by banks
to corporations as related to quick assets and liabilities.
 This project is a highly technical one which
bankers and brokers should grapple with until, as
Mr. Lounsdale said, the brokers’ loans should mark
a “scientific” figure.

Rediscount for Brokers’ Loans
[ would add this further proposal, that if the
Federal Reserve Banks were authorized to rediscount
 brokers’ loans, the influence of the Federal
Reserve System, Federal Banks and Federal Reserve
Board would be more easily exerted upon the member
 banks and less easily evaded. As it is now, a
member bank, while it cannot rediscount a broker's
loan, can rediscount other paper to take its place,
and by indirection can really evade the law which
now attempts to prevent the rediscount of loans with
collateral security. If the rediscount of brokers’
loans were permitted the banker would be far more
likely to lay his cards on the table instead of attempting
 any evasion; he would become more subject to
        <pb n="276" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 2§1
the advice, influence and even discipline of the Central
 Reserve Banks than at present. So instead of
proceeding, as some have hastily suggested, with
drastic legislation to put brokers’ loans even further
outside the pale. and attempting to solve the problem
 by law and strong-arm methods, it would be far
better to let the bankers and brokers solve the question
 out of court, so to speak, by such conferences as
President Hoover has organized in the past.

Ad New Method of Financing Security
Purchases
A yet more comprehensive proposal would provide
 a substitute for brokers’ loans. This may be
considered by those who have faith that the panic of
1929 may occasion a thoroughgoing change in the
stock market.
These argue that the panic of 1907 was caused by
a shortage of money due to our inadequate banking
system, and has therefore come to be known as a
money panic. In order that such a panic might not
come again the Federal Reserve System was started,
and it has proved its worth during subsequent crises.
Also, the panic of 1920 and 1921 was due largely to
inflated inventories and speculation by manufacturers
and merchants in raw materials and finished goods
— primarily because of inflation of credits. This led
to the “ear-marking” of surplus gold that would
otherwise work for inflation, and to hand-to-mouth
buying and rigid inventory control—methods that
        <pb n="277" />
        252 The Stock Market Crash—And After
showed their worth during the last half of 1929,
since there was no stoppage in the even flow of goods
due to excessive inventories.
Those who hope for like salutary changes flowing
from the present situation hold that the stock market
panic of 1929 was brought about by the system of
collateral loans that is now being used. There was
overspeculation and overextension of marginal accounts.
 There should have been a restriction in the
price level of securities to, say, 10 or 15 per cent
below the peak of September, 1929; but when the
market began automatically to make this correction,
it caused forced selling from the weakest marginal
accounts. This selling brought prices lower, again
making necessary additional selling by the next
weaker accounts. At the same time the lowering of
security prices reduced the purchasing power of those
who wanted to buy, and a panic ensued.
If, therefore, we wish to avoid panics of this particular
 type in future, it would seem necessary that a
new method of financing purchases of securities be
devised, and that such new method be substituted, at
least in part, for the present system of margins.

4 Method That Has Worked
Over a year ago I wished to purchase a block
of common stock in one of the companies in
which I was interested, but realizing the danger of
carrying this stock in a margin account I cast about
for a better method. The result of this study was
an option agreement, by means of which I secured
        <pb n="278" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 253
the control of a block of stock that was entirely
undisturbed during the decline. Had there been
more such option agreements in use and fewer
margin accounts I feel sure that the market would
have given a much better account of itself.
The Appendix presents a complete copy of this
agreement, omitting only the name of the company
and the specific price at which the stock changed
hands.

In a margin account the purchaser of the security
obtains a loan against the security as collateral, this
loan being subject to call at any time. Theoretically
such a loan is the safest type of loan, since the
lender may at any time demand repayment, and,
failing to receive it, he may sell the collateral held
on the market. But it was found in actual practice
during the panic that it was impossible to sell in so
short a space of time all the collateral that stood
behind weakened loans, therefore many lenders were
forced to abstain from calling their loans, if only to
protect themselves from the losses that would ensue.
The securities behind these loans then hung over the
market to be sold as soon as prices rose sufficiently
to liquidate the loans. We have seen, therefore,
that while in ordinary times the collateral loan may
be perfectly safe, in times of stress it is not safe.
Because of the ease with which surplus funds may
be put into the call loan market and withdrawn when
needed, and in view of the ordinary safety of such
loans, they are usually made at a very low interest
rate. We have become accustomed, due to the large
        <pb n="279" />
        254 The Stock Market Crash—And After
demand for this type of loan, to pay a high rate of
interest; but looking back over several years we find
that the rate was usually around between 3 and 4
per cent and has only occasionally risen above 6 per
cent. This is as it should be, since, if the lender
accepts only the minimum of risk, he should also
receive only the minimum return.
In my plan the accepter of the option agreement
voluntarily assumes a certain share of the risk for
which he receives a relatively high payment in return.
The purchaser of these securities assumes the larger
part of the risk, and is in a position to receive the
larger part of the profit in the event of advance in
price. He is also willing to pay more highly for
the funds that he is borrowing, since he is assured
of not being sold out in the event of a decline.
It is essentially a method of financing purchases
for the “long pull.” It is not suitable for the trader
who desires to be in and out of the market. The
volume of stock retained for long-term holding is
probably far greater in total than that used by the
trader, and were it lifted from the marginal loan
system there would be little opportunity for a break
of large magnitude to develop. But even should it
develop, the makers of these option agreements
would find their holdings undisturbed.
There was one difficulty that I found, however,
in making these option agreements. That was the
lack of an organized financial institution equipped
to make contracts of this character. It was therefore
necessary for me to approach private investors, and
        <pb n="280" />
        Remedies and Preventives of Panic 253

point out the advantages of the option agreement to
them individually. But if this idea should gain
favor, we might hope to see agencies develop which
would handle this class of paper. They could probably
 simplify the type of agreement, work out the
risks attached, and charge a rate which would
absorb these risks and yield a profit.
The panic has shown this credit difficulty in our
banking system. The option agreement is offered
as one available solution of the problem. Should
it be found not satisfactory, I hope that other economists
 and bankers will continue to put forward
suggestions until some method is found which will
make impossible transfers by losses in such huge
totals of the country's invested funds.

Resolution of American Bankers’ Association
for Inquiry
Perhaps all these proposals, as well as other suggestions
 for a permanent control against the recurrence
 of panic, might properly await the inquiry
planned in the resolution passed by the American
Bankers’ Association in San Francisco, October 3,
1929. This inquiry would go into the whole subject
of brokers’ loans by the Federal Reserve Board,
in cobperation with Stock Exchange authorities and
bankers. It would investigate all underlying facts
in connection with brokers’ loans, study the possibility
 of effecting greater stabilization of the money
rate, and then recommend such changes in procedure
as might be found advisable. Such an investigation
        <pb n="281" />
        256 The Stock Market Crash—And After
should be had, at any rate, before any resort to
hasty and ill-considered legislation.
The inquiry might be extended to include the
investigation into the banking system recommended
by President Hoover, relating to the development
of “group” and “chain” banking systems. The
President suggests that expansion of such systems
without restraint might dangerously concentrate con
trol of credits and prevent their proper direction
within those areas which furnish banking deposits.
But if legislation and voluntary remedial action
are held in abeyance pending inquiry on these weighty
matters, it is incumbent upon the investigators to do
their work promptly. The nation endured many
panics and listened to many elaborate reports on
banking reform before comprehensive action was
taken to provide the conduct of its business with an
elastic money system. This system won unanimous
support only after the Act had been applied. Will
the serious lessons of the panic of 1929 be ignored
and their application postponed until the nation runs
into another similar catastrophe?
        <pb n="282" />
        CHAPTER XVI

THE HOPEFUL OUTLOOK

IN the introduction and first chapter of this book
I have presented a picture of the market crash in
all its untoward aspects. There was a panic which
duplicated the great recession on the London Stock
Exchange, only in the United States the fall in prices
was swifter and sharper than that on the London
exchange or of any previous panic. When the
market touched bottom on November 13, twentysix
 billions had been cut* from the value of shares
listed on the New York Stock Exchange.
But in subsequent chapters I have shown that the
factors leading to the crash of the American stock
market were not factors of depression but of prosperity,
 unexampled prosperity. They were factors
identical with those which should bring about the
recovery of the long bull market, that had lasted
with but minor interruptions from the close of 1922.
It was in the main over-eagerness to profit by these
factors which produced the crash. The prime fault
lay in the credit structure. Just because there were
golden opportunities to invest, opportunities for
future dividends and profits that were not illusory
but real, there had been an undue haste, an undue
25%
        <pb n="283" />
        258 The Stock Market Crash—And After
eagerness to invest, and people had tried more and
more to do business on borrowed money.
Too many had speculated with margin accounts
and had thus made the market vulnerable to bear
raiders, despite the fact that margins were large.
The raids caught thousands of small holders of
stocks who had to sell at a sacrifice. After the
general level had been reduced, a new crop of forced
sales was harvested; and then, with still lower prices,
the same thing happened, through successive layers,
over and over again.
This book has presented reasons for believing
that the long bull market could not be explained by
the simple formula that it “went up because it went
up.” But the fall in the market was very largely
due to that psychology by which it went down
because it went down. It was a case of forced
liquidation, of distress selling.
At the end of the panic the prices in the stock
market were absurdly low, inviting the entry of new
funds as the general public in this country woke up
to the fact that the Stock Exchange presented one
of the most wonderful bargain-counters ever known
to investors.

Rich Nations Suffer Crises
M. Clement Juglar, the French financial writer,
says in Des Crises Commerciales (1889, pages 44-45):
 “Paradoxical as it may seem, the riches of
nations can be measured by the violence of the
crises which they experience.” Similarly, in his book,
        <pb n="284" />
        The Hopeful Qutlook 259
Financial Crises and Periods of Industrial and
Commercial Depression (1902), Theodore E.
Burton says:
“ . . A more important problem is the explanation
 of the conceded fact that during crises and
periods of depression, the aggregate wealth of the
communities affected does not give indication of such
decrease as would be expected, and that those countries
 which seem to suffer most from these disturbances
 show, from decade to decade, the greatest
increase in wealth and material prosperity.”
[f ever these words were applicable, they are
singularly applicable to this situation. President
Hoover, ex-President Coolidge, and Secretary Mellon
 have been excoriated for prompting the investing
 public to too great optimism concerning our
prosperity. They have been accused of making
political capital of it, just as Chairman Raskob of
the Democratic National Committee was accused of
making political capital of it at the Houston convention
 while the bull movement was being called
the “Smith Boom.” But it was not a factitious
boom, the figment of political imaginings. On the
studies of the remarkable rise in earnings of corporations
 during the bull movement, as presented
in this book, I would venture the opinion that
between two-thirds and three-fourths of the rise in
the stock market between 1926 and September, 1929,
was justified.
There was a remainder which was not justified.
Its unjustified character is best betokened by the
        <pb n="285" />
        260 The Stock Market Crash—And After
abnormal swelling of brokers’ loans. People who
were eager to profit went into debt for this purpose,
erecting a great credit structure more topheavy than
had previously been erected. Mr. Carl Snyder is
right in saying that the structure was a house of
cards. But this house of cards was built on a solid
mountain, the height of which dwarfed the house
of cards on its top.
After the tremendous fall in the stock market it
has become the fashion to decry the phrase “the
new era,” which so many were using and believing
in. That phrase may perhaps be exaggerated in its
implications. Mr. Snyder has pointed out that the
general rate of growth of production has been fairly
constant over long periods, and that it was interrupted
 by diminishment in the rate of production
per worket during the war and immediately after
the war. But from 1899 to 1922, the product per
worker hardly increased at all, and since 1922 it
has increased in a steeply ascending line to the highest
 rate of production known in history. For this
reason I believe that the Hoover Committee on
Recent Economic Changes was right when it reported
that “production per man hour of effort has risen to
new heights,” with “higher per capita income in
1922-1927 than ever before.”
Even a slightly increased “tempo” of production
finds a great magnification in the stock market. That
is because, as pointed out in the chapter on “The
Flight from Bonds to Stocks,” the rate of rise of
common stocks is much faster than that of fixed or
        <pb n="286" />
        The Hopeful Outlook 261

senior securities. That is, the common stock absorbs
the advantage which bonds, because of their fixed
return in dollars, cannot absorb. The common stock
will go up to the extent that the bonds and preferred
stocks cannot go up.

A Public Schooled in Borrowing
There had been an initial rise in the value of
common stocks because the dollar had depreciated
in purchasing power during the war, and here again
common stocks, because of this equity principle,
absorbed the lion's share of increased dollar earnings.
 It was not until the general public realized
that stock prices should rise even faster and higher
than the rise in the post-war level of commodity
prices that the great boom in common stocks
began.
Investment had also been encouraged by the war
“drives” to promote the sale of government bonds.
The public had been trained to “borrow to buy
bonds” and from that it was but a step to borrowing
 to buy common stocks.
After the war and post-war inflation and deflation
came the stabilizing of all prices on a higher level,
and on top of this stabilization came the marvelous
increase in the rate of production, with resultant
rises in earnings and in the rate at which earnings
were plowed back into business. All this justified
the expectation of prosperity and boosted the stock
price level still higher. Industry had found that in
its research laboratories, staffed by scientists from
        <pb n="287" />
        262 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
the universities, was the most profitable investment
ever made. Also, the war, with its inflation and
deflation, had resulted in a stoppage in immigration.
This helped to keep wages high and organized labor
was strong enough to resist that recession of wages
which would have followed naturally upon the business
 depression of 1920-1921. The heads of industry
 decided that high wages must be continued, and
that, therefore, it was up to them to save labor
by means of labor-saving inventions.
In addition to the great impulse toward laborsaving
 inventions, owners economized on labor by
introducing industrial management as never before.
The war had pyramided industrial mergers, which by
common consent were condoned. The willing codperation
 of labor with management followed upon
the conversion of the whole country to the advantages
 of higher production per man by the aid of
science.
The studies of the relation of stock prices to
earnings during this period of great increase in
wealth and earning power of corporations, made it
clear that the old arbitrary fashion of estimating
ten times the annual earnings as a fair selling price
for common shares was inadequate. With the rapid
changes in outlook of individual businesses, the
price-earnings ratio becomes meaningless as a guide
to investment without that constant scrutiny of prospects
 which the machinery of investment counsel and
investment trusts has lately provided. Earnings
have been increasing more steeply than formerly and
        <pb n="288" />
        rT

d

™

2 Q

| ma

4

n

§]

n

t

Fy
—

y

g

3

The Hopeful Outlook 263
have been discounted further and further into the
future. The consequence is that the average justifiable
 price-earnings ratio has risen. For the reasons
enumerated in this book it will hardly return to the
old level so long as there is still a prospect of rapid
future increases in earnings.
But even so, in most of the comparisons of 1929
with 1928 as to the average price-earnings ratios,
there is seen a decline in those ratios preceding the
stock market panic. This indicates that, with the
exception of two or three months immediately preceding
 the panic, the market was not much, if any,
overinflated.

Panic Might Have Been Avoided
Had there been no such piling up of margin
accounts as the totals of brokers’ loans revealed,
incidental in some degree to the issuance of nearly
eight and one-half billions worth of new securities
during the first nine months of 1929, there would
probably have been no panic.
Or, had there been no Hatry failure, which precipitated
 a panic and consequent fall in prices on the
London Stock Exchange to a deeper bottom than
on the New York Stock Exchange, thus occasioning
the immense withdrawals of funds of British holders
from the American stock market, it is quite arguable
that there would have been no American panic. The
increase in the brokers’ loan account during the
early stages of the American crash gave some measure
 of the selling by British holders, with the con-
        <pb n="289" />
        264 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After
sequent necessity of American borrowings to take
over the surrendered securities.
Again, Paul M. Warburg, formerly member of
the Federal Reserve Board, has pointed out
that had the rate of interest been raised in sympathy
 with the investment opportunities in America,
 instead of being lowered in accordance with
Federal Reserve easy money policy, the panic
might not have occurred. In my book on The
Theory of Interest (Macmillan, 1930) I have
emphasized the important influence of inventions on
the rate of interest. When a flood of new inventions
 gives opportunity to make more than the current
 rate of interest there is always a tendency to
go into debt, in order to make money out of inventions,
 and to the ordinary investor this comes in the
form of investing in common stocks. At such a time
the rate of interest should be high, embracing as it
does the opportunity to invest for a high rate of
return over cost. If there is a great discrepancy
between the rate to be realized to the investor from
his investment, and the rate of interest on which he
can borrow, he will be inclined to borrow all the
more.

But after the war our rate of interest was kept
artificially low, partly because we had so much gold.
After the inflation’ of 1919, much of this gold was
impounded and “ear-marked” for the purpose of
getting Europe back on the gold standard. The Reserve
 Board kept the rate of interest low in order
that this gold might not be reattracted to America.
        <pb n="290" />
        The Hopeful Outlook 265
Finally, when the long bull market asserted itself
in the high levels of 1927-1929, the Reserve System
 still wished to prevent an exodus of gold back
from Europe to the United States; it kept the rediscount
 rate low, partly for this purpose and partly to
maintain ‘“‘easy money” for business. This easy
money encouraged speculation, despite the efforts to
discriminate against brokers’ loans.
The Reserve authorities tried in vain, when speculation
 was in full swing, to discourage it by discrimination
 against brokers’ loans at quarterly periods,
when the “bootleg” lenders, to get cash for their
quarterly dividends, withdrew their loans temporarily
 from the market. Perhaps a once-for-all sharp
increase in the rediscount rate two years ago might
have hurt business to some extent then, but it might
have prevented the overgrowth of brokers’ loans,
and might have prevented the market crash later.
This is not the first instance of how the age-long
prejudice against high interest rates has done
harm.
But, of course, it is easy to be wise after the event
and to criticize what was done. The Federal Reserve
 System has, in general, acted with great wisdom
 and even in this particular problem of the stock
market we must not forget that it kept the banks
liquid and strong so as to prevent tight money and
bankruptcies when the crash came. In that emergency
 the whole banking machinery of the country
from the Federal Reserve Board down to the member
 banks worked splendidly.
        <pb n="291" />
        266 The Stock Market Crash—dnd After

Other Factors Apart from Justifying Causes
It is also possible that had there not been certain
other factors quite unassociated from the fundamental
 justifying causes of the long bull market, that
operated with the momentum of long and short-term
swings in the October-November crash, the crash
might have been prevented.
There was the downward turn in the business
trend resulting in a rather rapid decline in the average
 of wholesale prices during the summer of 1929;
but this was not so great as the 19277 down-turn had
been, and it could not alone account for the panic.
There was the tax on capital gains, discouraging the
active selling of stocks to take profits and encouraging
 the buying of new securities by the help of
loans instead of by the proceeds of sales of stocks.
There was the sudden increase of a billion dollars’
worth of new securities by the investment trusts,
with a lag in their reinvestment of the proceeds in
the stock market. Finally, there was the “boom”
enthusiasm which during the three months preceding
the panic, to a considerable degree, ignored yields
and earnings in its extravagant belief in the future
growth of business. This enthusiasm doubtless had
its hold upon intelligent speculators who had substantial
 grounds for their optimism as well as upon
the “lunatic fringe’ that always attends the performances
 of rising markets.
It is not altogether unlikely that there were other
facts and situations now unknown or hidden, which
        <pb n="292" />
        The Hopeful Outlook 267
may later be unearthed, which played important
roles in bringing about the panic.
All the untoward cases operated to produce a collapse
 from the high level of September 7th to the
low average of November 13th—a 42 per cent decline
 in my daily index of daily market prices. Overenthusiasm
 may have raised the September market
to a point fifteen to twenty per cent higher than was
warranted by the substantial justifying causes of the
bull market.

Plateau of 1926-1929 Remains
But because of these substantial reasons the general
 plateau of the stock market is still the plateau
of 1926-1929, still 55 per cent higher than it was
in 1926, and still vastly higher than any previous
plateau. During the period between 1913 and 1926
the new plateau had risen, according to the Dow-Jones
 average, by 88 per cent, as contrasted with a
40 per cent rise in commodity prices. That represented
 the absorption of advantages from a higher
general price level into the equities of common
shares. Since 1926 there has been a continued and
increasing absorption into these equities of advantages
 resulting from increased earnings and the
plowing-back of earnings into business at increasing
rates. In addition, these equities have absorbed
still greater advantages from the revolution in the
estimate of future earnings because of the mass
production of inventions by gigantic research laboratories,
 bettered business management, merger econ-
        <pb n="293" />
        268 The Stock Market Crash—dAnd After

omies, labor cobperation, prohibition and other
causes. All these advantages have been heightened
by a more secure expectation of increased earnings
residing in the stable purchasing power of the dollar
during the past seven years. As theretofore unstable
money had hindered business, so now stable money
promotes business. With this promotion there has
been an economic change in the attitude of investors
toward the risks of investment in common stock.
Bonds were once regarded as safe, and stocks as
unsafe; now, with the elimination of risks in diversified
 investments, and in changing investments as a
result of constant scrutiny of business prospects,
common shares have become popular because of
their comparative safety. I still hazard the statement
 that in spite of the tremendous harm that has
been done to common stocks during the panic of
1929, investment trusts have made it safer to invest
in common stocks than ever before.
Because of these solid achievements of the past
seven years, their present continuance, and the
assurance that they will be prolonged into the immediate
 future, I feel that the threat to business due to
the dislocation of purchasing power by reason of
transfers of stock holdings will be temporary. Fulfilment
 of the pledges by the nation’s business leaders
that industrial programs will be adhered to, that
wages will not be reduced, and that the “tempo” of
production on which all our prosperity has been
built will be maintained, should suffice to bridge
across the business recession that slightly antedated
        <pb n="294" />
        The Hopeful Qutlook 269
and accompanied the crash. The effects of the crash
were largely psychological. President Hoover's
instant realization that the panic of 1929 was peculiarly
 dominated by the psychological factor, enabled
him to give useful reassurance to the nation in the
business conferences held in Washington. Of course,
he did well to emphasize the purely temporary help
to be derived from an extended program of public
works. He was not tripped by the ‘“‘make-work”
fallacy, and he regarded the expedient merely as a
balance-wheel in an emergency. When increased
business again suffices to take up the slack in unemployment,
 public works should be restricted
accordingly. In the circumstances Mr. Hoover's
remedy, which consisted chiefly of reassurance, was
more efficacious than any of the other remedies to
counteract a repetition of the panics that are discussed
in this book. As a means of further present reassurance
 I trust that the book itself will be of some
use, besides affording substantial reasons for practical
 optimism for the future.
The only “fly in the ointment” is the danger in a
few years of gold shortage and long gradual deflation
 like the deflations after the Civil War and after
the Napoleonic Wars. And even this danger may
be averted if wise banking policies and gold control
are adopted in time. For the immediate future, at
least, the outlook is bright.
        <pb n="295" />
        APPENDIX

The option agreement, given in full below, may be
more briefly described as follows:
According to its terms I would, for instance, sell
John Smith one thousand shares at $20 per share,
which is much below the market price of, say, $30
a share. I would have the right to re-buy at $21
within six months, at $22 within twelve months, at
$23 within eighteen months, and so on, at an advance
in price of $1 every six months during five years, at
the expiration of which the contract would automatically
 terminate and the repurchase price at that time
would be $30.
In addition I would guarantee Smith a dividend
return of 7 per cent on the $20,000 received from
him.
The advance in the repurchase price means that, if
the option is exercised, Smith would receive not only
his 7 per cent, but $2 per share per annum above the
original purchase price of $20; that is, 10 per cent
per annum in addition to the 7 per cent, or 17 per
cent per annum altogether.
The chance that Smith would not get the full 17
per cent is simply the chance that within five years
the stock would be below $30, when Smith received
the stock. The only chance that Smith would not get
back his principal is the chance that the market price
"M1
        <pb n="296" />
        272

Appendix

would be below $20 at the end of five years. In that
case he would lose on his principal the difference
between $20 and whatever the stock would be worth
at the end of five years. Smith, by taking these small
chances of loss, has the guarantee of 7 per cent per
annum, and the probability of 10 per cent more;
while I am enabled by thus distributing the risk, in
small lots among Smith and others, to avoid a large
debt. The plan is a form of sharing profit or loss
with others, instead of giving to the creditor a rigid
lien.

OPTION AGREEMENT
A SUBSTITUTE FOR BROKERS’ LOANS
THis AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ...._...._____
day of 192... in the City of New Haven,
County of New Haven, and State of Connecticut, by and
between Irving FISHER, of said City of New Haven, party
of the first part; and .._.
of the city of

cereesy State of
----y Party of the second part; Witnesseth:
THAT, for and in consideration of the sum of One Dollar
($1.00), by each of the parties hereto to the other of them
in hand paid at or before the ensealing and delivery of these
presents, the receipt whereof is hereby interchangeably
acknowledged ; and of the mutual covenants herein contained ;
the parties hereto have mutually and severally agreed, and
by these presents do mutually and severally agree, as follows:
First. Immediately following the execution of this agreement,
 and as nearly as possible contemporaneously therewith,
the party of the first part will sell and deliver, or cause to
be delivered, to the party of the second part, a certificate or
certificates representing .......
        <pb n="297" />
        Appendix

273

{.&amp;lt;seserne.) shares of the common capital stock of ..................
ceceaens ne weeeeneny @ cCOTPoOration duly organized and existing
under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Delaware;
which certificate or certificates shall be duly endorced in
such form that the stock represented thereby may be transferred
 into the name of the party of the second part upon the
books of said ........ sereeeneeneees UUpoN the
delivery of the said certificate or certificates to the party of
the second part, the said party of the second part will pay
to the party of the first part, or his nominee, in cash.............
_— erereceemraesenees DO11ATS (eee) 5 Which
sum shall be paid and received in full satisfaction of the price
of the said stock, at twenty dollars ($20.00) per share.

SeconD. In consideration of the agreement of the party
of the first part to sell the said .............. eee
(..ceseeemene.) shares of stock to the party of the second part
at the price of o.oo. reeeeremeeeseanneenen 011ATS
(.-eereeeie.), and in further consideration of the guarantee of
dividends by the party of the first part to the party of the
second part as hereinafter set forth, the party of the second
part hereby covenants and agrees that, at the option and
request of the party of the first part, at any time within five
(5) years from the date of this agreement, the party of the
second part will sell and deliver, or cause to be delivered,
to the party of the first part, certificate or certificates representing
 .... creer (iecreereeennn.) shares
of the said common capital stock of said . ee ee
eveeennry endorsed in such form that the stock
represented thereby may be transferred into the name of the
party of the first part, or his nominee, upon the books of said
eernen enn anenens eereeccenneny, Which stock shall be
sold and delivered at the times, and for the prices, hereinafter
set forth. It is specifically understood and agreed, however,
that the party of the first part shall not be required to purchase
 any portion of said eevee eee (eee)
shares of stock from the party of the second part, unless he
        <pb n="298" />
        274

Appendix

shall desire so to do; that the said party of the first part, in
order to avail himself of this option, need not purchase the
entire amount of snecrcsnenizgs Cosistmpmenne)
shares during any one of the periods hereinafter specified, or
at any other time; but that the party of the first part, in
order so to avail himself of this option, need purchase from
the party of the second part, during any one of said periods,
or at any other time, only such portion of said total amount
of Lo. eeresrreneneineeones (conan...) shares as
he shall desire, and shall request the party of the second part
to deliver to him accordingly. The party of the first part
may, pursuant to the option hereby granted, purchase the said
reese eee (eceeeeeas.) shares of said stock,
or such smaller amount thereof as he may determine, at one
time during any one of the periods hereinafter specified; he
may purchase the said aggregate amount of
— weereree (eeeeeenns) shares partly during one of said
periods, and partly during any or all of the other of said
periods, as he may decide and notify the party of the second
part.
It is specifically understood and agreed, by and between
the parties hereto, that the granting of the foregoing option
to the party of the first part was a controlling factor in inducing
 the party of the first part to sell thesaid ........._
siemens (cel) shares of stock to the party of
the second part at the said priceof Dollars
(coon), and that, if the said option had not been granted
to the party of the first part upon the terms herein specified,
the party of the first part would have demanded a much
higher price for the said stock than the aforesaid sum of
vrivcenees Dollars (coy.

THirp. In full payment of all stock purchased by the
party of the first part from the party of the second part, pursuant
 to the option granted by Paragraph Seconp of this
agreement, the party of the first part shall pay, and the party
        <pb n="299" />
        Ry

Appendix

275

of the second part shall accept, the following prices in cash,
increasing every six months:
If sold at or before
4 year from date at $21 a shr.
1 year from date at $22 a shr.
1% years from date at $23 a shr.
2 years from date at $24 a shr,
2% years from date at $25 a shr.

3 years from date at $26 a shr,
3% years from date at $27 a sh.
4 years from date at $28 a shr.
4% years from date at $29 a shr.
§ years from date at $30 a shr,

FourtH. In consideration of the granting by the party
of the second part to the party of the first part of the foregoing
 option to purchase ........ .. weemnme (cones)
shares of the common capital stock of said ........... .
.... at the prices hereinbefore stated, the party
of the first part hereby guarantees that the party of the second
part shall during the life of this contract receive dividends at
the rate of at least one and three-quarters per cent (134%)
every three months upon the purchase price of all stock
acquired under this agreement and still outstanding at any
time, that is not rebought by the party of the first part. To
this end, if any regular quarterly dividend declared and paid
by the said corporation shall be at the rate of less than one
and three-quarters per cent (134%), the party of the first
part will pay to the party of the second part an amount
sufficient to bring said quarterly dividend so declared and
paid up to the full rate of one and three-quarters per cent
(134%) as if the same had been regularly declared and paid
by the said corporation. It is specifically understood and
agreed that the party of the second part shall be entitled to
all dividends declared and paid by the said corporation upon
the said stock, whether or not the same shall exceed one and
three-quarters per cent (134%) per quarter on said purchase
price; and that the foregoing guaranty of a minimum
quarterly dividend of one and three-quarters per cent
(134%) shall not have the effect of limiting in any way
the amount of dividends which the party of the second part
        <pb n="300" />
        276

Appendix

may be entitled to receive from the said corporation upon
the said stock, If, however, the party of the first. part shall
fail to make any payments as in and by this paragraph provided,
 for a period of thirty (30) days after the mailing of
a written notice by the party of the second part requiring
the party of the first part to make such payment, the party
of the. first part shall, following the said default, have no
further right to purchase the said arremne anon een
(-rneeeeeie.) shares of capital stock from the party of the second
part, or any portion thereof, nor further right to exercise the
option to purchase the said .._....___ tb mmm——————
(-reeeeneer.) shares given him by this agreement.

Fiera. All deliveries of stock pursuant to this agreement
shall be made, and all payments by either party hereto shall
be made, in the City of New Haven, Connecticut ; which
said City is hereby declared to be the place of the performance
 of all the terms and provisions of this agreement.

Sixt. All the terms and provisions of this agreement
shall be binding upon, and shall enure to the benefit of, the
heirs, legal representatives and assigns of the respective parties
hereto.

IN WiTnESs WHEREOF, the parties hereto have set their
hands and seals, the day and year first above written.

cecemeneee (LS)

reeceoennen (1.8)

StaTE oF CoNNECTICUT |
S58.
County oF New Haven §

192

Personally appeared Irving F ISHER, the signer and sealer
of the foregoing instrument, and duly acknowledged the same
to be his free act and deed, before me.

Notary Public
        <pb n="301" />
        Appendix

274

STATE oF
County OF
Personally appeared the signer
and sealer of the foregoing instrument, and duly acknowledged
 the same to be his free act and deed, before me. .

! $$.

1G2

Notary Public -
        <pb n="302" />
        INDEX

Adams, Charles Francis, Jr., 114
Agassiz, Louis, 120
Agricultural revolution due to
scientific invention, 136-7
Amalgamated Association of
Street and Railway Employees,
164
Amalgamations. See Mergers
American Acceptance Council,
46, 222
American Bankers’ Association,
42-3, 255
American Federation of Labor,
157, 160, 195
American Telephone &amp;amp; Telegraph,
 wire and wireless
mergers, 108
America’s New Frontier, 132
Anderson, Benjamin M., 235
Ad nnalist, The, xv
Artificial “floor” proposed for
New York Stock Exchange,
243-7
Association Against the Prohibition
 Amendment, 178-9
“Atlantic and Pacific” stores,
107
Automobiles: overproduction,
37; sales, 59; effect of their
increase on American life,
134-5
Axe, Emerson Wirt, xv
Avres, Leonard, go

Bank: mergers, 108; pool, 54;
stocks, 8, 9 (for list, see
Stocks)
Bankers’ acceptances, 4, 44
Bankers’ conferences, 6-7, 18
Bankers’ Trust Co., 6, 15°
Bank of England rediscount
rate, 4, 229
Baring panic, 1900, 31
Barnes, Julius H,, 27
Barron's Weekly, 31
Bear tactics, 43, 53-4, 240
Beckhart, Benjamin H., 235
Beer, Henry Ward, 107
Berlin Stock Exchange, 32, 230
Bethlehem Steel Company, 172-3,

211
Beyer, Otto S., Jr., 163, 164
Blumenthal, Daniel W., xi
Sonds: safety of, vs. stocks, 198;
their speculative character,
202
“Boom” enthusiasm as cause of
panic, 52-3
Boston Five-Cent Savings Bank,
213
Boston News Bureau, 95, 96
Bradford, Lindsay, 36
Brass merger, 103
Brokers’ loans, xv, xxi, 16, 42-3,
221, 250-2
Building decline, 1929, 42, 57, 59
Burton, Theodore E., 259
Business recession, 1929, 36

Babson, Roger W., xii, xv, 4
‘Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio plan,” 162-5 Cahill, M. H., 50, 247
27Q
        <pb n="303" />
        280

Calling of loans, 45
Call-money rate, 4
Canadian National Railways,
163
Capital gains, Federal tax on,
37-41, 248
Capper-Volstead Act, 112
Car loadings decline, 59
Causes of the panic, various
theories of, 31ff.
“Caution factor” in buying, 205-7
Cement merger, 108
Chance, element of, in buying
stocks and bonds, zo4-7
Chase National Bank, New York
City, 6
Check-up on status of stock-issuing
 companies, as safety principle,
 207-8
Chicago &amp;amp; Northwestern, 163
Chicago, Milwaukee &amp;amp; St. Paul,
164
Cities Service Co., 209
City Bank Farmers Trust Co,
New York City, 36
Clark, Wallace, 142, 144, 145
Clay, Paul, xv
Clayton Act, 106, 111
Collateral loan policy proposed
to avert panic, 247-8
Commercial and Financial
Chronicle, The, 5, 17, 43-4
Committee, joint, proposed for
passing on new issues, 249-50

Common Stocks as Long Term
Investments (Smith), 67, 200
Comparison of rates of increase
in stock prices over earnings,
and vice versa. See Stock
Prices
Conferences: Oct. 2, 6-7; at
White House, Nov. 13, 13, 17,
18. See National Business
Advisory Council

Index

Construction and maintenance
work expanded for stabilization,
 22-3, 28
Cooke, Morris Llewellyn, 142
Coolidge, Calvin, xi
“Coolidge boom” as cause, 52-3
Corn Exchange Bank, 13
Corporate incomes: net, 77-3;
profits absorbed, reserved, or
plowed back, 78-9; understated,
 82; gains in, 1929,
74-5
Corporations: showing “no net
income,” 75-7; publicity desirable
 for financial operations
of, 114-8
Cosmetic and perfume merger,
108
Credits: growth of, 1928, xiv,
xv; available after panic, 29;
increased volume of, allowed
by bankers, 41-2; overextension
 of, 98, 223
Crises Commerciales, Des (Juglar),
 258
Currency, unstable purchasing
power of, 182-97

Dairy merger, 108
Day, E. E,, 161
Deflation of currency, 187-8, 194
Dennison, Henry 8. 142, 143,
172
Diversification in buying securities,
 203-7
Dollar, fluctuating value of,
182ff,
Doran, J. M,, 177
Dow-Jones barometer, xv
Du Pont-U. S. Rubber combination,
 108

Earnings, 1929, 9x
Economic Effects of Prohibition
(Feldman), 173
        <pb n="304" />
        Index

281

Economists’ opinions of Prohibi- Federal tax on capital gains,
tion, 177-8 37-41, 248
Edison, T. A., 7, 125-6 Federal Trade Commission, 111
Edison Company stock split, de- Feldman, Herman, 175, 176
cision on, 37 Financial Crises (Burton), 259
Electric power; productivity per Fisher, Irving, his forecast of
unit increased, 131, 132; effect decline, xv
on American life, 133-4 Tord, Henry, 25-6, 115, 116
Employees’ insurance, 169-71 “oreign stock exchanges, 18-20,
Employment levels after the 230, 231; crash starting in
panic, 22 London, 20; liquidation in
Engineering: applied to indus- New York, 31-2; artificial
try, 142-56; in Europe, 144; “floor” of prices, 245-6
length of time needed to get Frank, Glenn, 133
results, 146; diagnosing diffi- Frey, John P.. 160
culties, 147; improving plant
layout, 148-50; factory planning
 for the future, 150-3;
charts for executives, 153-4;
benefits of scientific management,
 154-6
Engineering, “human,” to improve
 welfare of workers,
169-70
Equitable Trust Co., New York
City, 213
Equity securities, preponderance
of, 1928-9, 211
Ernst &amp;amp; Ernst, 69, 74
Exports, decline in, 60
Express company consolidation,
tof

Gantt, H. L., 142
General Electric, 116
General Motors, 116, 210
Gibbs, J. Willard, 120
Gilbert, Joseph E., 179
Glass, Carter, xi, xxi
Gold: exports to Europe, 226-7,
264; reserve threatened, 191
4; withdrawals, 49-50
Grace, Eugene G., 172-3
Grand Trunk Western R. R.,
164
Great Food Problem and Its
Solution (Willcox), 138
Green, William, x57, 158. 160.
195
Group insurance for emvloyees,
170-X
Guaranty Trust, 6, 15
Hadley, Arthur Twining, 113,
116
Hastings, New York State Senator,
 xi
Hatry failure, London, 4, 31, 230
Hazlewood, Craig B., xxi, 41
“Held” stocks increase in value
of, xix
Holding companies, 214, 217

Failures in business, 1923-7, 75
Federal Reserve Act, xx, III,
232; Board, xx, 113, 186, 188,
230, 232ff., 264-5; System, 21,
42, 50, 189, 240; advance in
rediscount rates, 1, 15, 18,
44-5; indexes of industrial
production, 121; influence on
dollar stability, 186-91; adviser
 to banks and business,
190; rediscount brokers’ loans,
220-1
        <pb n="305" />
        282

Hollander, Prof. Jacob H., 52-3
Holmes, Rev. John Haynes, xi
Hoover, President, xi, 12, 16, 17,
2tff, 57, 100, 104, 106, 110,
111, 126, 129, 142, 175, 256
“Hoover boom,” xvi
‘Human” engineering, 169-70
Humphrey, William E.. rr:

“Ideal Formula” for index of
production, 122
[ncome-tax cut, 1930, 13, 40, 238
Index numbers in production,
161
Industrial disputes reduced, 168
Industrial production, increase
in, due to science, 120ff.
Industrials, 2, 3, 15, 16, 114
Industry organized for stabilization,
 22-3
Inflation. See Credits
Insull, Martin J., 131
Insurance for workers, 169-71
Interest rates, short-time, depressed
 after 1920, 228, 230-1
International paper, 108
[nventions of value to industry,
127, 129, 131
Investment companies organized
by commercial banks, 34
Investment trusts, 49, 56, 204,
206, 214, 216
Investment and Purchasing
Power (Van Strum), zoo

Journal of Commerce, 34, 242
Juglar, Clement, 258
Karsten chart, xvi
Karsten Statistical Laboratories,
xvi
Kavanaugh, James E., 171
Kemmerer Commission, 144
Kemmerer, E. W., 134, 185
Kent, Fred I., 222-4, 226, 248-0

Index

King, W. I., 185

Labor: in relation to industrial
productivity, 157; to management,
 162-5
Labor's Ideals Concerning Management
 (Green), 158
Lamont, Thomas W., 6, 12
Legislation proposed, to avert
panics, 248
Ley, Harold A. 169
Liquidation, Oct. Nov., 1929,
causes of, 3, 9, 31ff.
London Stock Exchange, 20, 230
Lumber industry regulated by
trade conferences. 110

Making of Index Numbers, The
(Fisher), 122
Management of industry and
business: scientific methods
applied to, 142-56; shared by
Labor, 157-74; examples of
codperation, 162-5
Manufacturers’ Record, so-1
Margin system, substitute for,
as safeguard against panic,
251-2
Margins: too small to protect
borrowers, 46, 47; waived
after Oct. 28, 241; new proposal
 to figure, on value basis,
to avert panic, 248
Mark, the German, 183-4
Market, money, research proposed,
 to study causes of panic,
249
Mass-production, advantages of,
115
Meek, H. B., 247
Mellon, Andrew W., xi, 39
Mergers, 101-18; their increase,
101-2; effect on production
costs, 102, 104; on employment,
 105; now legitimate.
        <pb n="306" />
        Index

283

106-7; benefits, 107-9; how eral Reserve System, 189-90,
they may be made safe, rroff. 236
Millikan, Robert A., 125 Option agreements proposed for
Mitchell, Charles E., xx-xxi stock purchase instead of
Mitchell, Wesley C., 24 margin accounts, 252-3
Mitten Management, 164-5 Overextension of loans, 50-1, 53,
Modern Trade Unionism 98, 223
(Green), 157 Overvaluation of common stocks,
Money, fluctuating value of, 34
182-97
Money Illusion, The (Fisher),
183
Moratorium, 245
Morgan, J. P. &amp;amp; Co, 6, 12, 241
Motion picture company chain,
108

Packing industry, advance in,
136
Paish, Sir George, xii
Panic of 1837, xii
Panic, fall, 1929: advance indications
 of, xivff.; chronology,
including preliminary period:
(March 26, 3; April 18, xiv;
May 12, xvi; Sept. 5, xv,
xviii; Sept. 7, 2; Sept. 30, 2;
Oct. 18, xv; Oct. 21, 6, 7;
Oct. 28, 7, 8; Oct. 29, 2, 9;
Oct. 30, 11; Oct. 31, 11; Nov.
7, 12, 13; Nov. 11, 13; Nov.
12, 14; Nov. 13, xviii, 3, 12,
14, 15; Nov. 14, 15, 16; Nov.
15, 16; Dec. 1, 17; Dec. 11,
18; Dec. 27, 18); “technical”
character of, 15; contrast with
other panics, 243
Paris Bourse, 31, 230
Parr, Samuel W., 129
Patent Office, U. S., congestion
of recent inventions in, 126-7
Philadelphia Rapid Transit cooperative
 plan, 164-5
Pierson, Lewis E,, 191
Plaza Trust Co, New York
City, 50, 247
Plowed-back earnings, xxii, 29,
66-80
Population problems, foodstuffs,
etc, how solved by scientific
October 29 described, 9-10 inventions, 138-9
Open market committee of Fed- Power and light mergers, 108

National Bureau of Economic
Research, 130, 142, 161
National Business Advisory
Council, 2:ff., 27
National City Bank, New York
City, xiv, XX, 8, 13, 15, 49, 5%
68-9, 226
Nature of Capital and Income,
The (Fisher), 203
Neill, Charles P., 163
Net profits, swift rise in, 68-9
New capital issues, 4, 5, 6
New owners of stock since crash,
55, 62, 63
New York Stock Exchange in
1914 (Noble), 243-4
New York Times, xii, 14, 31, 91,
177
N.Y, N. H. &amp;amp; H. R. R,, 212
Noble, H. G. S., 243-4
“No net income’ corporations,
        <pb n="307" />
        284

Preventives of future panics,
238-56
Price agreements, legalizing of,
1x2-3
Prices of commodities, 25-6; stability
 in, 182; fall of, 58, 187;
Federal Reserve control of,
188
Prices of stock. See Stock
Prices
Productivity, increased by scientific
 management, 142-56;
its relation to labor, 161
Profits, corporate, absorbed as
salaries, 76-7
Prohibition, its economic effects,
175-81
Prohibition Still at Its Worst
(Fisher), 173
Psychological effect of the panic,
56, 60, 63-4
Public =~ Service Commission
(Mass.) decision in Edison
Co. stock split, 37
Publicity, advantages of, in relations
 between business and
consumer, 117

Quinby, Dr., of Hood Rubber
Co., 170

Railroad mergers, 108 ; stocks, 2,
3, 7; publicity given to earnings
 of, 114
Raskob, John J. xi, 259
“Rate of yield” defined, 201
Ratio of stock earnings to
prices. See Stock Prices
Rayon merger, ros
R. C. A—Victor merger, 108
“Real” vs. “nominal” yield on
investments, 201-2
Real estate values, effect of Prohibition
 on, 177
Recent Economic Changes re-Index



port, 67, 75, 90, 130, 143, 162,
164, 166, 195-6, 260; Committee,
 100, 102, 104, 120
Recovery from panic, 16, 21ff,,
59
Rediscount rates, Bank of England,
 4; on brokers’ loans,
250-1, 264-5. See Federal Reserve

Revenues “lost” through Prohibition,
 178-80
Ripley, William Z., 113, 115
Roberts, George E., 49-50, 226
Robertson, Thomas E., 127
Robinson, Leland Rex, 214
Robinson, Senator J. T. (Ark.),
xi, 52
Robinson, Senator A. R. (Ind.),
xi
Rockefeller, John D., and John
D., Jr, 12, 16
Roman, Frederick W., 183-4
Rorty, Malcolm C., xv
Ryan, A. H., 169
Safety fund proposed for emergencies,
 247
Safety standards proposed for
averting panics, 242
Scientific inventions in relation
to industry, 119-41
Scientific management, 142-56
Selective character of 1929 market,
 93-4
Selling-out forced by brokers?
43-4
Shareholders, numbers of, in.
creased since panic, 209-10
Sherman Act, 106
Shipping Board Act, 111
Simmons, E. H. H., 93, 221
Sinclair, John 8. 3x
Sloan, Laurence H., 83
Smith, Edgar Lawrence, 67, 99,
200
        <pb n="308" />
        Index

Snowden, Philip, Chancellor of
the Exchequer, 4
Snyder, Carl, 34, 76-8, 98, 260
Speculation, 218-37; on borrowed
 money, 218: the kind
that is gambling, 219-20
Stabilization, measures taken
toward, 21-30
Stable money since 1922, 182
“Standard Industries,” 107
Standard Oil of New York, 242
Standard Oil subsidiary companies,
 109
Standard Statistics Co., 69, 83,
84
Sterling exchange, 32
Stock conversions of funded
debt, 211-12
Stock Exchange, New York, 11,
17, 114
Stock exchanges, foreign. See
Foreign Stock Exchanges
Stock prices rising faster than
earnings, 67-8, 83-4; slower,
69-72; inflation of, 83-100; no
fixed ratio now possible, go-1;
justifiable level, 98-9; effect
of inventions on ratio, 140-1
Stocks: volume traded, 1929, 2-3;
 common, safety of, vs.
bonds, 198-217; purchase of
by individuals and institutions
 in 1929, 210-214
Stocks mentioned in this book:
Air Reduction, 96
Allied Chemical, xx, 96, 13%
Allis Chalmers, 96
American and Foreign
Power, 7, 12
American Can, 96, 242
American Locomotive, 96
American Smelting, 96
American Tel. &amp;amp; Tel, 7, 12,
95, 96, 131
American Tobacco “B,” 96

2835

Stocks mentioned in this book:
Anaconda, 95, 96
Atchison, 96
Atlantic Refining, 96
Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio, 96
California Packing, 96
Chesapeake &amp;amp; Ohio, 96
Chrysler, 7
Consolidated Gas, 96
Corn Products, 96
Curtiss-Wright, 13x
Du Pont, 96
Electric Bond &amp;amp; Share, 95
Fox Films, 131
General Electric, 7, 12, 95,
96, 131
General Motors, 7, 96
Gillette Safety Razor, 96
Hudson Motors, 96
[nternational Harvester, 97
International Tel. &amp;amp; Tel, 97
Johns-Manville, 131
Kennecott, 97
Liggett &amp;amp; Myers “B,” 95, 97
Loew’s, Inc, 97
Maytag, 131
Montgomery Ward, 95, 97
Nash Motors, 97
National Biscuit, 97
New York Central, 97, 228
North American, 97
Otis Elevator, 97
Packard Motor, 97
Paramount Famous Lasky,
97
Public Service of New Jersey,
 97
Radio Corporation, 95, 97,
131
Reynolds Tobacco “B,” 93,
97
Remington-Rand, 131
Southern Pacific, 97
Standard Oil of New Jersey,
 16, 97
        <pb n="309" />
        286

Index

Stocks mentioned in this books
Studebaker, g7
Texas Corporation, 97
Union Carbide, g7
Union Pacific, g7
United Fruit, 97
U. 8. Steel, 9, 12, 13, 16, 94,
97, 242
Western Union, 97
Westinghouse E. and M,, 7,
12, 97
Woolworth, g7
Unlisted Stocks:
Bank of America, 8
Bank of New York and
Trust, 15
Bank of U. 8, 8
Bank of the Manhattan Co.,
8
Bankers’ Trust, 15
Chase National, 8
Chatham-Phenix, 8
Corn Exchange, 13
Fifth Ave. Bank, 8
First National Bank, 8
Guaranty Trust, 15
National City Bank, 8, 15
Strikes, reduced in new era of
codperation, 166-8
Synthetic helium, 127
Synthetic rubber, 126

Trade unions in relation to productivity,
 157; represented in
management, 162-5
Tripp, Guy E., 133-4
“Trust-busting” in Roosevelt
and Wilson administrations,
106

“Undigested” securities, 5, 48
Union-management codperation,
162-5
U. S. Rubber absorbed by Du
Pont, 108
U. 8. Steel, 211
Utilities, 2, 3, 16
Van Buren, President, xii
Van Strum, Kenneth, 200
Voluntary codperation between
business and government, zy-30


Wages: maintained after panic,
22; relation to costs, 173
War business, its relation to recent
 prosperity, 79-80
Warburg, Paul M,, 264
Westinghouse, 116, 133
Willard, Daniel, 162
Willis, H. Parker, xii, 56
Woolworth stores, 107
Workers: their health, insurance,
 etc, 169-71; efficiency
promoted by Prohibition, 175-6

Tariff, its relation to the Panic,
47
Tax, Federal, on sale of stocks,
etc, 37-41
Taylor, Frederick Winslow, 142,
144
Theory of Interest, The
(Fisher), 264
Thomas, Woodlief, 161
Trade conferences to obviate industrial
 legislation, 110-131

Yale University, 212
Year 1929, better business than
1928, 69-75
Yield, real vs. nominal on investments,
 201-2
Young, Owen D.,, 108, 133, 170-1
        <pb n="310" />
        x
sC
Ba

Ss
aie

L 3
= Ja

(2
NY

\

T%

PO
on

&amp;gt;
nN

NJ
oS

ll
0

pie

i

Fr

i!
'z

mt

B

—
*

Labor’s Codperative Policy 165
Rival unions defeated the attempt to secure unionnagement
 codperation when this plan was first
ached for Philadelphia in 1911. Without disninating
 against union men, however, the plan
.tked in that city for sixteen years prior to the
ent two-thirds vote by the union that made it a
n for organized labor.
Like the somewhat different sort of management
the Baltimore &amp;amp; Ohio Railroad in the case of its
'pmen, the so-called “Mitten Management” plan
tifies its cooperative agreement with organized
or on two grounds: first, organization is needed to
tect the rights of labor; and second, labor organd
 for economic efficiency has the greatest power
public and private good.
oth systems freely provide union representation
management, and agreement to share fairly any
sequent benefits.

European Labor Dogma Reversed
Bettered industrial relations are mentioned by the
ting European delegations investigating Ameriindustries
 as one explanation of the growth in
* prosperity. Here the workmen have awakened
the fact that improved methods of production are
benefit to themselves as well as to the owner and
public. In the new labor compacts and in the
on banks, laborers have become capitalists. This
ontrary to the European industrial dogma, but it
ms to be winning, because it is based on sound
nan psychology and philosophy.

Cai
NO

dd
rr

t
        <pb n="311" />
        <pb n="312" />
        <pb n="313" />
        <pb n="314" />
        <pb n="315" />
        <pb n="316" />
        <pb n="317" />
        <pb n="318" />
        <pb n="319" />
        <pb n="320" />
        <pb n="321" />
        <pb n="322" />
        <pb n="323" />
        <pb n="324" />
        <pb n="325" />
        <pb n="326" />
        <pb n="327" />
      </div>
    </body>
  </text>
</TEI>
